2002 Chevrolet Venture Owner's Manual

2002 Chevrolet Venture Owner’s Manual

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the name VENTURE are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation. This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes after that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a whenever it appears in this manual. French Language Manual: Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. Aux propriétaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en français chez the new owner can use it. votre concessionaire ou au: Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207

ii How to Use this Manual Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning CAUTION: to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you do this, it will help you learn about the features and These mean there is something that could hurt controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find you or other people. that pictures and words work together to explain things quickly. In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find a circle Safety Warnings and Symbols with a slash through it in this book. This safety You will find a number of safety cautions in this book. symbol means “Don’t,” We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you “Don’t do this” or “Don’t about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore let this happen.” the warning.

iii Vehicle Damage Warnings Vehicle Symbols Also, in this book you will find these notices: Your vehicle may be equipped with components and labels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle, are shown along with the text NOTICE: describing the operation or information relating to a specific component, control, message, gage or indicator. These mean there is something that could damage If you need help figuring out a specific name of a your vehicle. component, gage or indicator reference the following topics in the Index: In the notice area, we tell you about something that D “Engine Compartment Overview” can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage D “Instrument Panel” would not be covered by your warranty, and it could D be costly. But the notice will tell you what to do to help “Comfort Controls” avoid the damage. D “Audio Systems” When you read other manuals, you might see Also see “Warning Lights and Gages” in the Index. CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words. You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

iv These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle:

v Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.

1-2 Seats and Seat Controls 1-54 Rear Seat Passengers 1-6 Rear Seats 1-58 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for 1-30 Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone Children and Small Adults 1-34 Here Are Questions Many People Ask 1-60 Center Passenger Position (Bench Seat) About Safety Belts -- and the Answers 1-62 Center Passenger Position (Bucket Seat) 1-35 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1-63 Children 1-36 Driver Position 1-67 Built-in Child Restraint (Option) 1-44 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1-79 Restraint Systems for Children 1-45 Right Front Passenger Position 1-98 Older Children 1-45 Air Bag Systems 1-101 Safety Belt Extender 1-54 Safety Belt Pretensioners 1-101 Checking Your Restraint Systems 1-102 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash

1- 1-1 Seats and Seat Controls Driver’s Four-Way Manual Seat This section tells you about the seats -- how to (If Equipped) adjust them, take them out, put them back in, fold Use the lever located on the and unfold them. front left side of the seat to Driver’s Two-Way Manual Seat adjust the seat forward or rearward. Pull up the lever Use the lever located on the to unlock the seat. front left side of the seat to adjust the seat forward or rearward. Pull up the lever to unlock the seat. Slide the seat to where you want it and release the lever.

Slide the seat to where you want it and release the lever. To make sure the seat is locked into place, try to move the seat back and forth with your body. To make sure the seat is locked into place, try to move the seat back and forth with your body.

1-2 To raise the seat, pull up on Manual Front Passenger Seat the lever located on the front right side of the seat. To move the seat, pull up the lever located on the front of the seat to unlock it.

To lower the seat, push the lever down. Adjust the seat Slide the seat to where you want it and release the lever. and release the lever. To make sure the seat is locked into place try to move the seat back and forth with your body. CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicle is not moving.

1-3 Six-Way Power Seat (Option) Reclining Front Seatbacks If your vehicle has this All front seats recline. option, the six-way power seat control is located on the outboard side of the driver’s seat.

D Move the front of the control up or down to adjust the front portion of the cushion up or down. D Move the rear of the control up or down to adjust the rear portion of the cushion up or down. D Lift up or push down on the whole control to move To adjust the seatback, pull up on the lever located on the entire seat up or down. the outboard sides of both the driver’s and the front D To move the whole seat forward or rearward, slide passenger’s seats. It is easier to recline the seat if you the control toward the front or rear of the vehicle. lean forward, taking your weight off the seatback.

1-4 CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job when you’re reclined like this. The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries. The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle For proper protection when the vehicle is in is moving. motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly.

1-5 Head Restraints Rear Seats Seat Controls The rear seats in your vehicle have levers and straps used to adjust, remove and reinstall the seats. By using the levers and straps, in the correct order, you can easily remove the seats from your vehicle. When you put the seats back in the vehicle, be sure to follow the label on the back of the seat for proper location. Second Row Safety Belt Stowage If your vehicle has a split bench seat in the second row, use the clip on the safety belt to secure the belt after it is disconnected from the mini-buckle. When removing the second row split bench seat, secure the loose end of the safety belt in this clip. This will keep the safety belt from dangling and possibly striking something. Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint Do not have the second row outside safety belt stored if is closest to the top of your head. This position reduces someone is sitting in the second row outside position. the chance of a neck injury in a crash. Head restraints are fixed on some models and adjustable on others. To adjust a head restraint, slide it up or down.

1-6 Flip and Fold Feature To return the seat(s) to their normal position, do the following: The rear seats in your vehicle can be folded forward. Use this feature for exiting and entering third row seats. 1. Push the seat back and firmly push the rear hooks onto the rear floor pins by pushing down on the rear 1. If the seats have the adjustable head restraints, push of the seat. them fully down. 2. Try to raise the seat to check that it is locked down. 2. Fold the seatback flat on the seat, by either pulling on the nylon strap on the rear of the seat or lifting up 3. Lift the seatback recliner lever or pull the nylon strap on the lever located on the front of the seatback. If on the back of the seat and raise the seatback until it the seat adjusts forward, slide it all the way back. locks upright. 4. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is locked. Split Bench Seats (If Equipped) If you have the split bench seat (50/50 or 40/60), the seatbacks can be folded down individually and the sections can be removed individually. The second row (40/60) sections can also be adjusted forward or rearward individually. The second row (40/60) split bench may be equipped 3. Release the rear set of hooks from the floor pins by with a built-in child restraint. See “Built-In Child pulling the nylon strap located at the base of the seat; Restraint” in the Index. hang on to the strap as the seat folds forward.

1-7 Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks To fold the seatback forward, pull this nylon strap located on the rear of CAUTION: the seat. The seatback will lock into place. If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked. To raise a seatback, pull the nylon strap while raising the The seatbacks on each section of the split bench seat seatback until it locks upright. Push and pull on the can be either folded forward or reclined. The following seatback to check that it is locked into place. explains how to use the nylon strap to fold or recline To recline the seatback, pull the nylon strap. Press back the seatbacks. on the seatback until you reach the desired position then let go of the nylon strap. To return the seatback to an upright position, pull on the nylon strap without putting any pressure on the seatback. Push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked into place.

1-8 The following explains how to use the recliner lever to Adjusting the Split Bench Seats (Second Row) fold or recline the seatbacks. The second row bench seats are adjustable. There are To fold the seatback two adjustment levers on each section of the split bench forward, lift up on the seats to adjust the seat forward or rearward. recliner lever located on the front of the seatback. The seatback will lock into place.

To raise a seatback, lift the recliner lever while raising the seatback until it locks upright. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is locked into place. To recline the seatback, lift the recliner lever. Press back on the seatback until you reach the desired position then One is located below the center, in the front of each let go of the recliner lever. section of the split bench. To return the seatback to an upright position, lift the recliner lever without putting any pressure on the seatback. Push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked into place.

1-9 The other lever is located on Removing the Split Bench Seat the rear of the seat. Make sure the seatback is in the upright position. 1. For the second row split bench, with the seatback in the upright position, unhook the side attachment for the safety belt. This mini-buckle is located on the right side of the seat. 2. Push the red center of the buckle up with a small pointed object -- like a key or a pen -- to Lift up either lever and slide the seat forward or remove the seat belt, rearward. Release the lever. Push and pull on the seat to if needed. make sure it is locked into place.

3. Lift the seatback recliner lever or pull the nylon strap on the back of the seat to fold the seatback forward. 4. Slide the seat all the way back by lifting one of the adjustment levers and sliding the seat fully rearward.

1-10 5. From behind the bench seat, pull the nylon strap at 6. To unlatch the front latches, squeeze the angled bar the center of the base of the seat to release the rear toward the straight crossbar. latches from the floor pins. 7. Remove the seat by rocking it slightly forward, then Do not let go of the strap until the seat is folded all toward the rear of the vehicle and then pulling it out. the way forward. Repeat these steps for the other section of the split bench seat.

1-11 Replacing the Split Bench Sections CAUTION: CAUTION: A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted won’t provide the If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move protection needed in a crash. The person wearing forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could the belt could be seriously injured. After cause injury to the person sitting there. Always installing the seat, always check to be sure that press rearward on the seatback to be sure it the safety belts are properly routed and attached, is locked. and are not twisted.

Make sure the seatback is in the upright position and the CAUTION: safety belts are on the correct section of the seat. Don’t put the sections of the bench seat in so they face rearward because they won’t latch that way. If you want A seat that isn’t locked into place properly can more storage room behind the second row seat, adjust move around in a collision or sudden stop. People each section by sliding it forward. in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to lock the seat into place properly when installing it. The split bench seats have seat position labels, located on the back of each seat, showing where the seat must go. Follow that diagram. The seat must be placed in the proper location for the legs to attach correctly.

1-12 Make sure the seat is in the full rear position before 2. Make sure the beginning this procedure. bench seat is angled so that the front hooks clear the floor pins.

If the front legs are not attached correctly, the rear legs will not attach to the rear set of floor pins.

1. Squeeze the angled bar toward the solid crossbar while placing the front hooks of the bench seat onto the front two floor pins.

1-13 3. Firmly push the rear hooks onto the rear floor pins by pushing down on the rear of the seat. 4. Try to raise the seat to check that it is locked down. 5. Lift the seatback recliner lever or pull the nylon strap on the back of the seat and raise the seatback until it locks upright. 6. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is locked. 7. If you have the 40/60 seat, attach the mini-buckle so that the safety belt is ready for use when a passenger uses the seat. The buckle reattaches by pushing the latch into the buckle until the red center pops out again. If the front latches are not attaching correctly, check that the seat is in the full rear position. Repeat these steps for the other section of the split bench seat. Bucket Seats (If Equipped) If you have the rear bucket seats, the seatbacks can be folded down or reclined. The seats can also be adjusted forward or rearward and removed.

1-14 Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks To raise a seatback, pull the nylon strap while raising the seatback until it locks upright. CAUTION: To fold the seatback forward, lift up on this lever located on the If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move front of the seatback. forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked.

The seatback on a bucket seat can be either folded down or reclined. The following explains how to use either the nylon strap or the lever to fold or recline the seatback. Use the lever to raise or lower the seatback to the To fold the seatback desired position. forward, pull this nylon strap on the rear of the seat. When raising a seatback to an upright position, push and pull on the seatback to make sure that it is locked upright.

1-15 Adjusting the Bucket Seats The other lever is located on There are two adjustment levers on each seat to adjust the rear of the bucket seat. the seat forward or rearward.

Lift up either lever and slide the seat forward or rearward. Release the lever. Push and pull on the seat to make sure that it is locked into place.

One is located below the center, in front of the bucket seats.

1-16 Removing the Bucket Seats 3. From behind the seat, pull the nylon strap, located at Make sure the seatback is in the upright position. the base of the seat, to release the rear latches from The head restraints should be fully down. the floor pins. 1. Lift the seatback recliner lever or pull the nylon strap on the back of the seat to fold the seatback forward. 2. Slide the seat all the way back by lifting either one of the adjuster levers and sliding the seat fully rearward.

You can also lift the lever on the side of the seat to release the rear latches from the floor pins. Do not let go of the strap or the lever until the seat is folded all the way forward.

1-17 Replacing the Bucket Seats

CAUTION:

If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked.

4. To unlatch the front latches, with the seat CAUTION: folded forward, squeeze the angled bar toward the straight crossbar. A seat that isn’t locked into place properly can 5. Remove the seat by rocking it slightly forward, then move around in a collision or sudden stop. People toward the rear of the vehicle and then pulling it out. in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to lock This should be done in one motion. the seat into place properly when installing it.

1-18 Make sure the seat is in the full rear position before CAUTION: beginning this procedure. 1. With the seat folded, squeeze the angled bar toward A safety belt that is improperly routed, not the solid crossbar while placing the front hooks of properly attached, or twisted won’t provide the the bucket seat onto the front two floor pins. protection needed in a crash. The person wearing 2. Make sure the the belt could be seriously injured. After bucket seat is installing the seat, always check to be sure that angled so that the the safety belts are properly routed and attached, front hooks clear and are not twisted. the floor pins.

Don’t put the seats in so they face rearward because they won’t latch that way. If you want more storage room behind the seat, adjust the seat by sliding it forward. The bucket seats have seat position labels, located on the back of the seat, showing where the seat must go. If the front legs are not attached correctly, the rear Follow that diagram. The seat must be placed in the legs will not attach to the rear set of floor pins. proper location for the legs to attach correctly.

1-19 3. Firmly push the rear hooks onto the rear floor pins by pushing down the rear of the seat. 4. Try to raise the seat to check that it is locked down. 5. Lift the seatback recliner lever or pull the nylon strap on the back of the seat and raise the seatback until it locks upright. 6. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure that it is locked in place.

If the front latches are not attaching correctly, check that the seat is in the full rear position.

1-20 Captain’s Chairs (If Equipped) If your vehicle has the captain’s chairs, the seatbacks can be folded forward or reclined and the seats can be removed. Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks

CAUTION:

If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked.

1-21 To recline the seatback, lift up on the recliner lever, Adjusting the Captain’s Chairs (Second Row) located on the outboard side of the seat. Use the recliner The second row captain’s chairs can be adjusted forward lever to move the seatback to the desired position. or rearward. It is easier to raise or lower the seatback if you lean There are two adjustment levers on each seat. One is forward, taking the weight off the seatback. located below the center, in front of the seat. The other The seatbacks on the second row captain’s chairs also is located across the rear of the seat. fold forward to put items behind the left and right seats. Lift up either lever to slide the seat forward or rearward. Lift up on the recliner lever and fold the seatback Release the lever. Push and pull on the seat to make sure forward. The seatback will lock into place when you it is locked into place. push it back to the upright position. The armrests can be lowered or raised for entering or exiting the vehicle.

1-22 Removing the Captain’s Chairs

2. The seat can then be lifted off the front floor pins and removed from the vehicle. 1. Pull the nylon strap behind the chair to release the rear hooks from the floor pins.

1-23 Replacing the Captain’s Chairs CAUTION: CAUTION: A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted won’t provide the If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move protection needed in a crash. The person wearing forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could the belt could be seriously injured. After cause injury to the person sitting there. Always installing the seat, always check to be sure that press rearward on the seatback to be sure it the safety belts are properly routed and attached, is locked. and are not twisted.

Don’t put the seats in so they face rearward because they won’t latch that way. For the second row, if you want CAUTION: more storage room behind the seat, adjust the seat by sliding it forward. A seat that isn’t locked into place properly can The captain’s chairs have seat position labels, located on move around in a collision or sudden stop. People the back of the seat, showing where the seat must go. in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to lock Follow that diagram. The seat must be placed in the the seat into place properly when installing it. proper location for the legs to attach correctly. Make sure the seatbacks are in the upright position, the seat belts are on the correct side of the chairs and the second row captain’s chairs are in the full rear position before beginning this procedure.

1-24 1. Hook the front latches over the front floor pins. 2. Push the rear of the seat down to lock the rear latches onto the rear set of floor pins. 3. Push and pull on the seat to be sure it is properly attached.

1-25 Stowable Seat (Option) To fold down the seatback, pull up on the lever located The optional stowable seat is a full bench seat and on the back of the seat and comes with the convenience center. See “Convenience push the seatback down Center” in the Index for more information. The stowable until it is locked into place. seat can be removed and replaced, or with the seatback folded, it can lie flush with the convenience center. Folding the Seatback

CAUTION:

If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked.

1-26 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure that it is Removing the Stowable Seat locked into place. 1. Remove the convenience center, if it is in the To raise the seatback, do one of the following: vehicle. See “Convenience Center” in the Index D From the rear of the vehicle, pull up on the lever to for more information. release the seatback, then pull the strap, located on 2. Make sure all items are off of the stowable seat. the right side of the seat, to pull the seatback up. The R 3. If the seatback is down, put the seatback in its seatback has a Velcro patch to stow the strap on the upright position before removing the seat. See rear of the seat when not in use, or “Folding the Seatback” previously. D from the passenger’s side sliding door, pull up on the lever to release the seatback, then push up on the seatback to raise the seat. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure that it is locked into the upright position.

1-27 4. From behind the bench seat, push up the release Replacing the Stowable Seat handles at the base of the seat to release the latches from the floor pins. 5. While holding onto the crossbar at the bottom of the CAUTION: seat, remove the seat by rocking it slightly toward the rear of the vehicle and then pulling it out. This If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move should be done in one motion. forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it NOTICE: is locked. Do not use the release handles to pull the seat out. The handles could break during removal. This will not be covered by your warranty. Use the crossbar at the bottom of the seat when pulling CAUTION: the seat out. A seat that isn’t locked into place properly can move around in a collision or sudden stop. People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to lock the seat into place properly when installing it.

1-28 The seat must be placed in the proper location for the CAUTION: legs to attach correctly. Make sure the seat is in its upright position before A safety belt that is improperly routed, not beginning this procedure. properly attached, or twisted won’t provide the 1. Place the front hooks of the seat onto the front floor protection needed in a crash. The person wearing pins in the third row. To do this, the seat will need to the belt could be seriously injured. After be angled so the front hooks clear the floor pins. installing the seat, always check to be sure that If the front legs are not attached correctly, the rear the safety belts are properly routed and attached, legs will not attach to the rear set of floor pins. and are not twisted. 2. Firmly push the rear hooks into the rear floor pins by pushing down on the rear of the seat. Do not put the stowable seat in so it faces rearward 3. Try to raise the seat to make sure that it is because it will not latch that way. The stowable seat has locked down. to go in before the convenience center. See “Convenience Center” in the Index for more information. 4. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure that it is locked into place. The stowable seat has seat position labels, located on the back of the seat, showing where the seat must go. Follow the floor pin diagram. Use the front floor pins of the floor cups and the rear floor cups in the third row.

1-29 Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts CAUTION: properly. It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, And it explains the air bag system. inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to CAUTION: ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and safety belt properly. you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries can be much worse. You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you might not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts are fastened properly too.

1-30 Your vehicle has a light Why Safety Belts Work that comes on as a reminder to buckle up. See “Safety When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as Belt Reminder Light” in it goes. the Index.

In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work. You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one. A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed. After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot! Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on wheels.

1-31 Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider doesn’t stop.

1-32 The person keeps going until stopped by something. or the instrument panel ... In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...

1-33 Here Are Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts -- and the Answers Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I’m wearing a safety belt? A: You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you’re upside down. And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted. Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to wear safety belts? A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future. But they are or the safety belts! supplemental systems only; so they work with With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, system ever offered for sale has required the use of and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air safety belts make such good sense. bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions.

1-34 Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from How to Wear Safety Belts Properly home, why should I wear safety belts? Adults A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you and This part is only for people of adult size. your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver Be aware that there are special things to know doesn’t protect you from things beyond your about safety belts and children. And there are different control, such as bad drivers. rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see the part of this manual Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) called “Children.” Follow those rules for of home. And the greatest number of serious everyone’s protection. injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your than 40 mph (65 km/h). vehicle has. Safety belts are for everyone. We’ll start with the driver position.

1-35 Driver Position This part describes the driver’s restraint system. Lap-Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it properly. 1. Close and lock the door. 2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Don’t let it get twisted. The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

1-36 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. 5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash, or end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt. if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor. 1-37 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster To move it down, push down on the button and move Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt the height adjuster to the desired position. You can move adjuster to the height that is right for you. the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide. After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to move it down without pushing the button down to make sure it has locked into position. Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

1-38 Q: What’s wrong with this? CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly as much protection this way.

1-39 Q: What’s wrong with this? CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

1-40 Q: What’s wrong with this? CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this. The belt would be much too high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The belt force would then be applied at the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.

A: The belt is over an armrest.

1-41 Q: What’s wrong with this? CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move too far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen.

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.

1-42 Q: What’s wrong with this? CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

1-43 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. The belt should go back out of the way. Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the belt and your vehicle. A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

1-44 The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the Air Bag Systems mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For This part explains the frontal and side impact air pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making bag systems. safety belts effective is wearing them properly. Your vehicle has four air bags -- a frontal air bag for the driver, another frontal air bag for the right front Right Front Passenger Position passenger, a side impact air bag for the driver, and To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s another side impact air bag for the right front passenger. safety belt properly, see “Driver Position” earlier in Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of this section. injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag. But The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job way as the driver’s safety belt -- except for one thing. and comply with federal regulations. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way and start again.

1-45 Here are the most important things to know about the air bag systems: CAUTION: (Continued) moderate to severe crashes where something hits CAUTION: the side of your vehicle. They aren’t designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover or in rear crashes. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if belt properly -- whether or not there’s an air bag you aren’t wearing your safety belt -- even if you for that person. have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air bags are designed to work with safety belts but don’t replace them. CAUTION: Frontal air bags for the driver and right front passenger are designed to work only in moderate Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate with to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle great force, faster than the blink of an eye. If hits something. They aren’t designed to inflate at you’re too close to an inflating air bag, as you all in rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, would be if you were leaning forward, it could or in many side crashes. And, for some seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep you in unrestrained occupants, frontal air bags may position for air bag inflation before and during a provide less protection in frontal crashes than crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with more forceful air bags have provided in the past. frontal air bags. The driver should sit as far back The side impact air bags for the driver and right as possible while still maintaining control of the front passenger are designed to inflate only in vehicle. Front occupants should not lean on or CAUTION: (Continued) sleep against the door.

1-46 There is an air bag readiness CAUTION: light on the instrument panel, which shows the air bag symbol. Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety The system checks the air bag electrical system for belt system nor its air bag system is designed for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical them. Young children and infants need the problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index for more information. protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle. To read how, see the part of this manual called “Children.”

1-47 How the Air Bag Systems Work Where are the air bags?

The right front passenger’s frontal air bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger’s side. The driver’s side impact air bag is in the side of the The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle of the driver’s seatback closest to the door. steering wheel.

1-48 CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and an air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death. The path of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put anything between an occupant and an air bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other air bag covering. Don’t let seat covers block the inflation path of a side impact air bag.

The right front passenger’s side impact air bag is in the side of the passenger’s seatback closest to the door.

1-49 When should an air bag inflate? If your vehicle strikes something that will move or The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or higher. The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation “threshold level.” would not help the occupant. In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal air The side impact air bags are designed to inflate in bags, which adjust the amount of restraint according moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact air bag to crash severity. For moderate frontal impacts, these will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s air bags inflate at a level less than full deployment. designed “threshold level.” The threshold level can vary For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs. with specific vehicle design. Side impact air bags are not If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level for rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not the reduced deployment is about 12 to 18 mph (19 to help the occupant. A side impact air bag will only 29 km/h), and the threshold level for a full deployment deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck. is about 18 to 24 mph (29 to 38.5 km/h). The threshold In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so bag should have inflated simply because of the damage that it can be somewhat above or below this range. to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact air bags, inflation is determined by the location and severity of the impact.

1-50 What makes an air bag inflate? How does an air bag restrain? In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For both even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing system the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related hardware of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of wheel, instrument panel and the side of the front the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, seatbacks closest to the door. stopping the occupant more gradually. But the frontal air bags would not help you in many types of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward the air bag. Side impact air bags would not help you in many types of collisions, including frontal or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags, and only in moderate to severe side collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s side impact air bags.

1-51 What will you see after an air bag inflates? After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly CAUTION: that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated. Some components of the air bag module -- the When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air. steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, the This dust could cause breathing problems for instrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag, the people with a history of asthma or other side of the seatback closest to the door for the driver and right front passenger’s side impact air bags -- will be breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the hot for a short time. The parts of the bag that come into vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. If you have breathing problems but can’t get out There will be some smoke and dust coming from the of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t fresh air by opening a window or a door. prevent the driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.

1-52 In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag, windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. NOTICE: Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger air bag. If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the D Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an right front passenger’s air bag, or the air bag air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for your covering on the driver’s and right front air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air bag passenger’s seatback, the bag may not work system won’t be there to help protect you in another properly. You may have to replace the air bag crash. A new system will include air bag modules module in the steering wheel, both the air bag and possibly other parts. The service manual for your module and the instrument panel for the right vehicle covers the need to replace other parts. front passenger’s air bag, or both the air bag D Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic frontal module and seatback for the driver’s and right sensor, which helps the sensing system distinguish front passenger’s side impact air bag. Do not between a moderate frontal impact and a more open or break the air bag coverings. severe frontal impact. Your vehicle is also equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which records information about the frontal air bag system. The module records information about the readiness of the system, when the system commands air bag inflation and driver’s safety belt usage at deployment. The module also records speed, engine rpm, brake and throttle data. D Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag systems. Improper service can mean that an air bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer for service. 1-53 Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle Safety Belt Pretensioners Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced. Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners. You’ll find There are parts of the air bag systems in several places them on the buckle end of the safety belts for the around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual driver and right front passenger. They help the safety have information about servicing your vehicle and the belts reduce a person’s forward movement in a air bag systems. To purchase a service manual, see moderate to severe crash in which the front of the “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index. vehicle hits something. Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a crash, you’ll need to get new ones, and probably other new CAUTION: parts for your safety belt system. See “Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash” in the Index. For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air Rear Seat Passengers bag can still inflate during improper service. You It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up! can be injured if you are close to an air bag when Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are probably part of the air bag systems. Be sure to wearing safety belts. follow proper service procedures, and make sure Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown the person performing work for you is qualified out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others to do so. in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.

1-54 Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions

Lap-Shoulder Belt 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder Don’t let it get twisted. belts. Here’s how to wear one properly. The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

1-55 2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it In the third row, if the belt stops before it reaches the will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and buckle, tilt the latch plate and keep pulling until you start again. If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety can buckle it. Belt Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

Third Row Outside Passenger Position Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. 3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.

1-56 CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor. To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. 1-57 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults Your vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort guides. This feature will provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for small adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions the belt away from the neck and head. If your vehicle has bucket seats in the second row, there is one guide for each outside passenger position. If your vehicle has a bench seat in the second row, there is one guide for the driver’s side outside passenger position. To provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt: 1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket on the side of the seatback.

1-58 2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges 3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat. of the belt into the slots of the guide. The guide must be on top of the belt.

1-59 Center Passenger Position (Bench Seat)

4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as described in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions” earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder. To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out of the guides. Slide the guide into the storage pocket.

1-60 Lap Belt If your vehicle has a third row rear bench seat, someone can sit in the center position.

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug. Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough, When you sit in the center position of the bench seat, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section. you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned along the belt. so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-61 Center Passenger Position (Bucket Seat)

When you sit in the center position bucket seat, you Lap Belt have a lap safety belt which has a retractor. If your vehicle has bucket seats, someone can sit in the 1. Pick up the latch plate and, in a single motion, pull center position bucket seat. the belt across you. Don’t let it get twisted. 2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, let it go back all the way and start again. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. 3. Feed the lap belt into the retractor to tighten it. 1-62 Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes infants and all other children. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle. Infants and Young Children Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have the protection provided by the appropriate restraint. Young children should not use the vehicle’s safety belts, unless there is no other choice.

4. Position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-63 CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in their arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much -- until a crash. During a crash a baby will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s arms. A baby should be secured in an appropriate restraint.

1-64 CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to, any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer outstanding protection for adults and older children, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide.

1-65 Q: What are the different types of add-on child restraints? CAUTION: A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types. Newborn infants need complete support, Selection of a particular restraint should take into including support for the head and neck. This is consideration not only the child’s weight, height necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is and age but also whether or not the restraint will be weak and its head weighs so much compared with compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a be used. rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the crash forces can be distributed across the For most basic types of child restraints, there are strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and many different models available. When purchasing shoulders. Infants always should be secured in a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in appropriate infant restraints. a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition, there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs.

1-66 Built-in Child Restraint (Option) CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child is quite unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom the safety belts are designed. A young child’s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a body area that’s unprotected by any bony structure. This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young children always should be secured in appropriate child restraints.

Bucket Seat

1-67 If your vehicle has this option in a bucket seat, each bucket seat that has the built-in child restraint fits in only one location in your vehicle. To find out where a bucket seat that has a built-in child restraint must be located in your vehicle, see “Removable Rear Bucket Seats” in the Index. If your vehicle has this option in a 60/40 bench seat, this bench seat will only fit in the second row of your vehicle. In both types of seats, the built-in child restraint works the same way. This child restraint system conforms to all applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Each child restraint is designed for use only by children who weigh between 22 and 40 pounds (10 and 18 kg) and whose height is between 33.5 and 40 inches (850 and 1 016 mm) and who are capable of sitting upright alone. 60/40 Bench Seat The child should also be at least one year old. It is important to use a rear-facing infant restraint until the child is about a year old. A rear-facing restraint gives the infant’s head, neck and body the support they would need in a crash. See “Child Restraints” later in this section for more information.

1-68 Q: What if the top of my child’s shoulders is above the shoulder belt slots for the five-point child CAUTION: restraint harness system? A: A child whose shoulders are above the shoulder BEFORE YOU USE THIS CHILD RESTRAINT, belt slots for the five-point child restraint harness BE SURE THE TOP OF THE CHILD’S system shouldn’t use this child restraint. Instead, SHOULDERS IS BELOW THE SLOTS THAT the child should sit on the vehicle’s regular seat THE HARNESS GOES THROUGH. A CHILD cushion and use the vehicle’s adult safety belts. WHOSE SHOULDERS ARE ABOVE THOSE SLOTS COULD BE INJURED DURING A SUDDEN STOP OR CRASH. IF THE TOP OF THE CHILD’S SHOULDERS IS ABOVE THE SLOTS, DON’T USE THIS CHILD RESTRAINT WHILE THE VEHICLE IS IN MOTION.

1-69 Securing a Child in the Built-In Child Restraint

2. Rotate the head restraint rearward until it touches the top of the seatback. Make sure there is no gap between the lower edge of the head restraint and the 1. Raise the head restraint until the lower edge of the top of the seatback. head restraint is even with the top of the seatback.

1-70 3. Lower the child restraint cushion. You’ll be using the child restraint’s harness (A) to secure your child. Don’t use the vehicle’s safety belts.

1-71 CAUTION:

Using the vehicle’s regular safety belts on a child seated on the child restraint cushion can cause serious injury to the child in a sudden stop or crash. If a child is the proper size for the built-in child restraint, secure the child using the child restraint’s harness. But children who are too large for the built-in child restraint should sit on the vehicle’s regular seat and use the vehicle’s adult safety belts.

WARNING! FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS ON THE USE OF THIS CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM 4. Before placing the child in the child restraint, add CAN RESULT IN YOUR CHILD STRIKING THE slack to the shoulder harness. Pull the black shoulder VEHICLE’S INTERIOR DURING A SUDDEN harness release strap firmly. At the same time pull STOP OR CRASH. SNUGLY ADJUST THE both shoulder harness straps through the slots in the BELTS PROVIDED WITH THIS CHILD seatback as shown. RESTRAINT AROUND YOUR CHILD. 5. Place the child on the child restraint cushion.

1-72 6. Select only one side of the harness. Place the harness 10. Pull up on both latch plates to make sure they over the child’s shoulder. are secure. 7. Push the latch plate (B) into the buckle until it clicks. Be sure the buckle is free of any foreign objects that may prevent you from securing the latch plates. If you can’t secure a latch plate, see your dealer for service before using the child restraint. 8. Place the other side of the harness over the child’s shoulder. 9. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. 1-73 CAUTION:

An unfastened shoulder harness clip won’t help keep the harness in place on the child’s shoulders. If the harness isn’t on the child’s shoulders, it won’t be able to restrain the child’s upper body in a sudden stop or crash. The child could be seriously injured. Make sure the harness clip is properly fastened.

11. Now fasten the left and right halves of the shoulder harness clip together. The purpose of this clip is to help keep the harness positioned on the child’s shoulders.

1-74 12. Pull the shoulder harness adjustment strap (C) 13. Adjust the position of the harness on the child’s firmly until the harness is snugly adjusted around shoulder by moving the clip along the harness until the child. You should not be able to put more than it is level with the child’s armpits. On each side of two fingers between the harness and the child’s the harness, the shoulder part should be centered on chest. Make sure the harness and buckle strap are the child’s shoulder. The harness should be away not twisted. from the child’s face and neck, but not falling from the child’s shoulders. If you expect that the child will sleep while riding, you can recline the seatback. See “Seats” in the Index. 1-75 Removing the Child from the Built-In Child Restraint

2. Unlatch the harness by pushing the button on the buckle. 3. Move one side of the harness off the child’s shoulder. 1. Unfasten the shoulder harness clip. 4. Move the other side of the harness off the child’s shoulder. 5. Remove the child from the child restraint cushion.

1-76 Storing the Built-In Child Restraint Always properly store the built-in child restraint before using the vehicle’s lap-shoulder belt.

2. Fold the child restraint cushion and leg rest up into the seatback. 3. Press the child restraint cushion firmly into the seatback. 1. Move both latch plates and both sides of the shoulder harness clip to the bottom of the harness straps.

1-77 4. Then press the leg rest firmly into the seatback, and 5. Rotate the head restraint forward and push it all the secure it by pressing the upper corners against the way down. fastener strips on the seatback. Just like the other restraint systems in your vehicle, your built-in child restraint needs to be periodically checked and may need to have parts replaced after a crash. See “Checking Your Restraint Systems” and “Replacing Seat and Restraint System Parts After a Crash” in the Index.

1-78 Restraint Systems for Children

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant. The An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed to acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint. restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the center of the vehicle.

1-79 A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields. booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window.

1-80 Q: How do child restraints work? When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it A: A child restraint system is any device designed for will have a label saying that it meets federal motor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position vehicle safety standards. children. A built-in child restraint system is a permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a child restraint system is a portable one, which is booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in purchased by the vehicle’s owner. your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within For many years, add-on child restraints have used the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury. the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help reduce When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the the chance of injury, the child also has to be instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so system secures the add-on child restraint in the if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy from vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness the manufacturer. system holds the child in place within the restraint. Q: When securing an aftermarket child seat in a One system, the three-point harness, has straps that bucket seat, I am unable to get the seat fastened come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and in snugly enough. What should I do? buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness system has two shoulder straps, two hip A: With some child seats, it may be difficult to tighten straps and a crotch strap. A shield may take the the vehicle belts so that there is less side-to-side or place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder front-to-back movement of the child seat. A straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low replacement buckle, which makes it easier to secure against the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type your child seat, is available from your dealer at no shield has straps that are attached to a wide, charge to you. shelf-like shield that swings up or to the side. 1-81 Where to Put the Restraint Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child restraint properly. Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move General Motors, therefore, recommends that child around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it. forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in Top Strap the front passenger seat. Here’s why: Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.” It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision. For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to CAUTION: the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints are designed for use with or without the top strap being A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be anchored. Others require the top strap always to be anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions seriously injured or killed if the right front for your child restraint. If yours requires that the top passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the strap be anchored, don’t use the restraint unless it is back of the rear-facing child restraint would be anchored properly. very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. You may secure a forward-facing child restraint Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit in the right front seat, but before you do, always is available. move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

1-82 Don’t use a child restraint that requires a top strap in the right front passenger’s position because there’s no place to anchor the top strap. Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed. If you have an adjustable head restraint, route the top strap under it. Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions say.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be anchored. In the United States, some child restraints also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be anchored.

1-83 Second Row Third Row An anchor bar for a top strap is located at the rear of the seat cushion for each second and third row outboard seating position, and for the center position of the second row.

1-84 Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH System) Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You’ll find anchors (A) in the second row outboard bucket seats, the 40 side of the 60/40 split bench seat and both second row captain’s chairs. To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this child restraint system, each seating position with the LATCH system will have a grey dot on the seatback or you will see the latches between the seatback and cushion.

Third Row (Stowable Seat) The anchor bar for the stowable bench seat is located on the passenger’s side of the crossbar. Use the center seating position to use the anchor properly. If the convenience center is in the vehicle, you must lift the tray sill to use the anchor. See “Convenience Center” in the Index for more information.

1-85 In order to use the system, you need either a forward-facing child restraint that has attaching points (B) at its base and a top tether anchor (C), or a rear-facing child restraint that has attaching points (B), as shown here.

With this system, use the LATCH system instead of the vehicle’s safety belts to secure a child restraint.

1-86 Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the CAUTION: LATCH System 1. Find the anchors for the seating position you want to If a LATCH-type child restraint isn’t attached to use, where the bottom of the seatback meets the back its anchorage points, the restraint won’t be able of the seat cushion. to protect a child sitting there. In a crash, the 2. Put the child restraint on the seat. child could be seriously injured or killed. Make 3. Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to the sure that a LATCH-type child restraint is anchors in the vehicle. The child restraint properly installed using the anchorage points, or instructions will show you how. use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the 4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach the top restraint. See “Securing a Child Restraint in a strap to the top strap anchor. See “Top Strap” in the Rear Outside Seat Position” in the Index for Index. Tighten the top strap according to the child information on how to secure a child restraint in restraint instructions. your vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belts. 5. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top strap from the top tether anchor and then disconnect the anchor points.

1-87 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH Outside Seat Position system, see “Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH)” in the Index. You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say. 1. Put the restraint on the seat. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.

1-88 Third Row Outside Passenger Position 3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is In the third row, tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the if needed. safety belt quickly if you ever had to. If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or neck, put it behind the child restraint.

1-89 4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of 5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the the retractor to set the lock. retractor while you push down on the child restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 6. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. 1-90 Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Seat Position (Third Row Bench Seat)

1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch You’ll be using the lap belt. Be sure to follow the plate and pulling it along the belt. instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the 2. Put the restraint on the seat. instructions say. 3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint. The child restraint instructions will show restraint has one. you how.

1-91 4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push down on the child restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 6. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.

1-92 Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Seat Position (Bucket Seat)

2. Pull the lap belt all the way out without stopping. You’ll be using the lap belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure to 3. While holding it out, run the belt through or around follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. the child restraint. The child restraint instructions Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the will show you how. instructions say. 1. Put the restraint on the seat.

1-93 4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is 5. To tighten the belt, feed it back into the retractor positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the while you push down on the child restraint. If you’re safety belt quickly if you ever had to. using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 6. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. 1-94 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the front passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat.

Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.

Your vehicle has a front passenger air bag. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:

1-95 You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say. 1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will go before securing a forward-facing child restraint. See “Seats” in the Index. 2. Put the restraint on the seat. 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or neck, put it behind the child restraint. 4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-96 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of 6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the the retractor to set the lock. retractor while you push down on the child restraint. You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. 1-97 Older Children Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts? A: If possible, an older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash. Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat. In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety belts properly.

Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle’s safety belts. If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.

1-98 CAUTION:

Never do this. Here two children are wearing the same belt. The belt can’t properly spread the impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A belt must be used by only one person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt, but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child’s face or neck? A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide. If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position, see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” in the Index. If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child’s face or neck, you might want to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt, if your vehicle has one.

1-99 CAUTION:

Never do this. Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in a crash the child might slide under the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

1-100 Safety Belt Extender Checking Your Restraint Systems If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light should use it. and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your anchorages are working properly. If your vehicle has a dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go built-in child restraint, also periodically make sure the in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the harness straps, latch plates, buckle, clip, child head extender will be long enough for you. The extender will restraint and anchorages are working properly. Look for be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that any other loose or damaged safety belt and built-in child you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it restraint system parts. If you see anything that might only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it keep a safety belt or built-in child restraint system from to the regular safety belt. doing its job, have it repaired. Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away. If your vehicle has the built-in child restraint, torn or frayed harness straps can rip apart under impact forces just like torn or frayed safety belts can. They may not protect a child in a crash. If a harness strap is torn or frayed, get a new harness right away. Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.)

1-101 Replacing Restraint System Parts If the frontal air bags inflate, you’ll also need to replace the driver’s and right front passenger’s safety belt After a Crash buckle assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new buckle If you’ve had a crash, do you need new safety belts or assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision. built-in child restraint parts or LATCH system parts? If safety belts or built-in child restraint harness straps After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary. are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision damage also But if the safety belts or built-in child restraint harness may mean you will need to have safety belt, built-in straps were stretched, as they would be if worn during a child restraint, LATCH system or seat parts repaired or more severe crash, then you need new parts. If the replaced. New parts and repairs may be necessary even LATCH system was being used during a more severe if the safety belt, built-in child restraint or LATCH crash, then you may need new LATCH system parts. system wasn’t being used at the time of the collision. If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section.

1-102 Section 2 Features and Controls

Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting, shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.

2-2 Windows 2-56 Shifting Out of PARK (P) 2-5 Keys 2-57 Parking Over Things That Burn 2-7 Door Locks 2-57 Engine Exhaust 2-10 Remote Keyless Entry System (Option) 2-58 Running Your Engine While You’re Parked 2-17 Multifunction Alarm Locks and 2-59 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever Lighting Choices 2-67 Exterior Lamps 2-27 Dual Sliding Doors 2-68 Interior Lamps 2-29 Power Sliding Door (Option) 2-74 Storage Compartments 2-36 Liftgate 2-87 Accessory Inflator System (Option) 2-37 Theft 2-89 Accessory Power Outlets 2-38 Content Theft-Deterrent (Option) 2-90 OnStarR System (If Equipped) 2-40 PASS-KeyR III 2-94 HomeLinkR Transmitter (Option) 2-43 New Vehicle “Break-In” 2-98 The Instrument Panel -- Your 2-43 Ignition Positions Information System 2-45 Starting Your Engine 2-102 Warning Lights, Gages, Messages 2-46 Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped) and Indicators 2-47 Automatic Transaxle Operation 2-112 Message Center 2-52 Parking Brake 2-120 Driver Information Center (DIC) (Option) 2-53 Shifting Into PARK (P) 2-123 Rear Parking Assist (Option) 2- 2-1 Windows

CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous. A child can be overcome by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never leave a child alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather.

Manual Windows Use the manual crank to open and close the front windows.

2-2 Power Windows (Option) If your vehicle has power windows, the switches on the driver’s door armrest control the front windows when the ignition is in RUN, ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See “Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” in the Index. The left switch controls the driver’s window. The right switch controls the passenger’s window. The driver’s power window switch has two down positions. The first position lowers the window normally. The second position activates the express-down feature. Push the switch down to the first position to lower the window normally. To raise the window, pull up on the front of the switch. Express-Down Window To activate the express-down feature, push the AUTO switch all the way down to the second position, then release it. The window will lower completely. To stop the window from lowering all the way, pull up on the front of the switch.

2-3 Side Window Latches Power Rear Quarter Windows (If Equipped) The rear of each side window swings open. This button, located To open, press the latch in the overhead console forward to release it, then switchbank, is used swing the window outward. for opening and closing Press the center of the latch the power rear to secure the window in the quarter windows. open position.

Press the textured part of the switch to open the To close, pull the center of the latch forward and then windows; both windows will open. The windows can be close the latch. Press the center of the latch to secure the opened fully or partway depending on how long the window in the closed position. switch is pressed. Press the part of the switch with the symbol on it to close both windows. The windows can be closed fully or partway depending on how long the switch is pressed. The ignition must be in RUN, ACCESSORY or retained accessory power (RAP) must be active, to use the power rear quarter windows. See“Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” in the Index.

2-4 Keys

CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with children.

2-5 This key can be used for the Any new PASS-Key III key must be programmed before ignition as well as all door it will start your vehicle. See “PASS-KeyR III” in locks, the liftgate lock and the Index for more information on programming your the storage compartments. new key.

NOTICE:

Your vehicle has a number of new features that can help prevent theft. But you can have a lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your key inside. You may even have to damage your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have an If you need a new key, contact your dealer, who can extra key. obtain the correct key code. Your vehicle has the PASS-KeyR III vehicle theft system. The key has a transponder in the key head that If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call the matches a decoder in the vehicle’s steering column. If a Chevrolet Roadside Assistance center. See “Roadside replacement key or any additional key is needed, you Assistance” in the Index. must purchase this key from your dealer. The key will If your is equipped with the OnStar system with an have PK3 stamped on it. Keep the bar code tag that active subscription and you lock your keys inside the came with the original keys. Give this tag to your dealer vehicle, OnStar may be able to send a command to if you need a new key made. unlock your vehicle. See “OnStarR” in the Index for more information.

2-6 Door Locks There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle. From the outside, use your key or the optional remote keyless entry transmitter. CAUTION: To unlock either front door from the outside with the key, insert the key and turn it toward the front of the vehicle. Unlocked doors can be dangerous. To lock either front door from the outside with your key D Passengers -- especially children -- can insert the key and turn it toward the rear of the vehicle. easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle won’t open it. You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors aren’t locked. So, wear safety belts properly and lock the doors whenever you drive. D Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out. A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle whenever you leave it. D Outsiders can easily enter through an From the inside, use the manual or power door locks. unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can help To unlock either front door from the inside, pull back on prevent this from happening. the manual lever. To lock either front door from the inside, push the manual lever forward. 2-7 Power Door Locks To unlock any door or the liftgate from the outside with your key, turn the key toward the front of the vehicle and release it. This will only unlock that door or the liftgate. To unlock all the doors and the liftgate at once, insert the key into the key cylinder, then turn it toward the front of the vehicle and hold it for one second. With power door locks, you can lock all the doors from the outside by inserting the key and turning the key toward the rear of the vehicle. Also, when the doors are locked with the power door locks, the inside as well as the outside door handle cannot open the doors. This safety feature prevents a door from being accidentally opened from the inside by moving the handle. From the inside, press the front of the power door lock To override this safety feature, unlock the door you want switch (on either front door) to unlock all doors and the to open. liftgate. If your vehicle has the optional content When the liftgate has been unlocked with the power theft-deterrent system, the power door lock switch will door locks, you won’t need the key to open it. Simply not unlock the doors until the system is disarmed. See squeeze the handle located above the license plate. This “Content Theft-Deterrent” in the Index for more details. is also true if you use the optional remote keyless entry You can lock all doors and the liftgate from the inside transmitter. See “Remote Keyless Entry System” later in by pressing the rear of the power lock switch on either this section. front door. If your vehicle has the optional content theft-deterrent system, the power door lock switch may cause the system to arm. See “Content Theft-Deterrent” in the Index for more details. 2-8 Last Door Closed Locking If someone needs to get out while you are not in PARK (P), have that person use the manual lever or the The last door closed locking feature will delay the power door lock switch. When the door is closed again, power locking of the doors and liftgate for up to it will not lock automatically. Use the manual lever or five seconds after exiting the vehicle, when the power the power door lock switch to lock the door. door lock switch or the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to lock your vehicle. To change the way the automatic door locks operate, see “Multifunction Alarm Locks and Lighting Choices” in To cancel this delay, press the power door lock switch the Index. or the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter a second time immediately. With the automatic door locks feature, you can lock or unlock the doors at any time, either manually or using If any door or the liftgate is open when locking the the power door lock switches. vehicle, three chimes will be heard signaling that last door closed locking is being used. Five seconds after Sliding Door Delayed Locking the last door is closed, all of the doors will lock. If either sliding door is open when you use the power If the ignition is in RUN or ACCESSORY, this feature door locks to lock the vehicle, the sliding door that is will not lock the doors. open will not lock. Normally the last door closed To turn the last door closed locking feature off or on, see locking feature will be used to lock the sliding door after “Multifunction Alarm Locks and Lighting Choices” in it has been closed. the Index. When the ignition is on or if the last door closed locking feature has been overridden or programmed to be off, Automatic Door Locks the sliding door delayed locking feature will lock your All of the doors will lock automatically when you move sliding door for you. Three seconds after either sliding your shift lever out of PARK (P). All doors will unlock door is closed, all the doors will lock. automatically when the ignition is turned off while the shift lever is in PARK (P).

2-9 Lockout Deterrent Remote Keyless Entry System (Option) The lockout deterrent feature makes it difficult for you If your vehicle has this to lock your keys in your vehicle. If the driver’s door is feature, you can lock and open while the keys are in the ignition, a chime will unlock your doors and the sound and you will not be able to use your power door liftgate from about 3 feet lock switch to lock the vehicle. (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m) If you don’t leave the keys in the ignition or if you away using the remote use the manual door lock, you could still lock your keys keyless entry transmitter in your vehicle. Always remember to take your keys supplied with your vehicle. with you. To turn this feature off or on, see “Multifunction Alarm Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index. Leaving Your Vehicle Your remote keyless entry system operates on a radio If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your frequency subject to Federal Communications door and set the locks from the inside. Then get out and Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. close the door. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

2-10 This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this Remote Driver’s Door and All Door Unlock device must accept any interference received, including When you press UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry interference that may cause undesired operation of transmitter, only the driver’s door will unlock. If you the device. press UNLOCK again within five seconds, all the doors Changes or modifications to this system by other than an and the liftgate will unlock. If you would like all the authorized service facility could void authorization to doors to unlock the first time you press UNLOCK, see use this equipment. “Multifunction Alarm Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index. At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the If your vehicle has the optional content theft-deterrent transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer system, the UNLOCK button on the remote keyless to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this: entry transmitter will disarm the system. See “Content Theft-Deterrent” in the Index for more details. D Check the distance. You may be too far from your vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy Remote All Door Lock or snowy weather. To lock all doors, press LOCK on the remote keyless D Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be entry transmitter. See “Power Door Locks” in the Index blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or for more details on the power door lock features. If your right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again. vehicle has the optional content theft-deterrent system, D Check to determine if battery replacement is the LOCK button may arm the system. See “Content necessary. See the instructions that follow. Theft-Deterrent” in the Index for more details. D If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a qualified technician for service.

2-11 Remote Lock Confirmation (Option) If you would like to change the way the parking lamps If your vehicle has the optional content theft-deterrent operate with remote unlock confirmation, see system, your remote keyless entry transmitter will have “Multifunction Alarm Locks and Lighting Choices” in this feature. the Index. When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to Panic Alarm (Option) lock your vehicle, the parking lamps will flash to let you When you press the panic button with the horn symbol know the command has been received. If you press the on the remote keyless entry transmitter, the parking LOCK button again, within five seconds, the horn will lamps will flash and the horn will sound. This will allow sound and the parking lamps will flash to let you know you to attract attention, if needed. the vehicle is already locked. Press the panic button to stop the alarm from sounding. If you would like to change the way the parking lamps and horn operate with remote lock confirmation, see Remote Power Sliding Door Operation (Option) “Multifunction Alarm Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index. If your vehicle has the optional power sliding door, your remote keyless entry transmitter will have a button that Remote Unlock Confirmation (Option) has a van symbol on it. Press it to open or close the sliding door. See “Power Sliding Door” later in If your vehicle has the optional content theft-deterrent this section. system, your remote keyless entry transmitter will have this feature. If your vehicle has the optional dual power sliding doors, your remote keyless entry transmitter will have When you use your remote keyless entry transmitter to two buttons that have a van symbol on it. The van unlock your vehicle or to operate the optional power symbol on the left is for the driver’s side sliding door sliding door(s), the parking lamps will flash to let you and the van symbol on the right is for the passenger’s know the command was received. side sliding door. See “Power Sliding Door” later in this section.

2-12 If the sliding door(s) is locked, first unlock all doors, Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle then press the van symbol to open the sliding door(s). The parking lamps will flash when the right power Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to sliding door button is pressed and they will not flash prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. when the left power sliding door button is pressed. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be Press the van symbol again to close the sliding door(s). purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any See “Remote Driver’s Door and All Door Unlock” remaining transmitters with you when you go to your earlier in this section and “Power Sliding Door” later in dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement this section. transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the You can operate the power sliding door(s) with the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your remote keyless entry transmitter only when the power vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four sliding door override switch(es) on the overhead console transmitters matched to it. is turned off. See “Power Sliding Door” later in this section. See your dealer to match transmitters to another vehicle. If the vehicle’s fuel filler door is opened, the driver’s side power sliding door will not open completely. Do not try to force the door. Once the fuel filler door is closed, the driver’s side sliding door can be opened normally.

2-13 Battery Replacement Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last about three years. You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t work at the normal range in any location. If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works, it’s probably time to change the battery. Replacing the Battery in the Remote Transmitter

NOTICE:

When replacing the battery, use care not to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your 2. Gently pry the battery out of the transmitter. Do not body transferred to these surfaces may damage use the metal flanges to “pop out” the battery. the transmitter. 3. Replace the battery. 4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure the halves are 1. Insert a flat object like a coin into the slot on the side snapped together tightly so water will not get in. of the transmitter and twist it to separate the halves. 5. Check the transmitter operation.

2-14 Switchbanks This switchbank is located in the overhead console. The switchbank may include the interior lamps override, There are two sets of switchbanks located in the front the power sliding door, the power sliding door override, of the vehicle. The switches will vary with the options the power rear quarter windows and the rear parking aid that are on your vehicle. It is useful to become familiar disable. If your vehicle has the optional dual power with them since they are used frequently while operating sliding doors, the switchbank will have both power the vehicle. sliding door switches. The power sliding door override Overhead Console Switchbank switch will be integrated on the power sliding door switches. If your vehicle does not have some of the options controlled by these switches, there will be a blank switch in its place. For more information, see each of these features in the Index.

2-15 Instrument Panel Switchbank This switchbank is located in the instrument panel below the comfort controls. The switchbank may include the rear fan knob, the rear window wiper/washer and the traction control. If your vehicle does not have some of the options controlled by these switches, there will be a blank switch in its place. For more information, see each of these features in the Index. If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional rear climate control system, there will be a storage space in this switchbank. The rubber mat can be removed for cleaning. Snap the mat into place after cleaning.

2-16 Multifunction Alarm Locks and Lighting Choices Your vehicle’s locks and lighting systems can be programmed with several different features. The features you can program depend on the options that came with your vehicle. The following chart shows the features that can be programmed. To determine which features your vehicle is equipped with, follow the steps listed for entering the programming mode.

2-17 Entering Programming Mode Delayed Illumination and Exit Lighting To program features, your vehicle must be in the This feature allows you to customize the interior lamps programming mode. Follow these steps: when entering and exiting the vehicle. 1. The optional content theft-deterrent system must be Programmable Modes disarmed. See “Content Theft-Deterrent System” in this section. Mode 1: Both Features Off (The interior lamps will turn on or off at the same instant that a door is opened 2. Remove the BCM PRGRM fuse from the instrument or closed.) panel fuse block, located to the right of the glove box. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index. Mode 2: Delayed Illumination Only (The interior lamps will stay on for about 25 seconds after all the doors and 3. Close the driver’s door. liftgate are closed, or until you lock the doors.) 4. Turn the ignition key to ACCESSORY. Mode 3: Exit Lighting Only (The interior lamps will 5. Count the number of chimes you hear. You will come on whenever you remove the key from the ignition hear two to four chimes depending on the features and stay on for about 25 seconds, or until you lock your vehicle is equipped with. Refer to the chart the doors.) shown previously. Mode 4: Both Features On (This combines You can now program your choices. Modes 2 and 3.) To exit the programming mode, follow the steps listed under “Exiting Programming Mode” later in this section.

2-18 Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it Automatic Door Locks was programmed to one of the modes listed previously. To determine the mode your vehicle is programmed This feature allows you to customize the automatic to or to program your vehicle to a different mode, do locking and unlocking of the doors using the gearshift. the following: Programmable Modes 1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming Mode 1: Both Features Off (Automatic door locking Mode” listed previously. and unlocking is disabled. You will always need to 2. Turn the interior lamps on by turning the instrument lock your doors manually before driving to increase panel brightness control all the way up. occupant safety.) 3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number Mode 2: Automatic Door Locking Only of chimes indicates the vehicle’s current D The automatic door unlock feature is turned off. programmed mode. (If you do not wish to change the current mode, you can either exit the programming D Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and the mode by following the instructions later in this driver’s door closed; all doors will lock automatically. section or program the next feature available on Mode 3: Automatic Unlocking with the Ignition Off your vehicle.) D Turn off the ignition with the transaxle in PARK (P); 4. Turn the interior lamps control off to change the all doors will unlock automatically. current mode. D Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and the 5. Turn the interior lamps control from on to off until driver’s door closed; all doors will lock automatically. you hear the number of chimes corresponding to the mode selection you want. The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle. 2-19 Mode 4: Automatic Unlocking with Transaxle 4. Press LOCK to change the current mode. in PARK (P) 5. Press LOCK until you hear the number of chimes D Shift into PARK (P) with the ignition on; all doors corresponding to the mode selection you want. will unlock automatically. The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit D Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and the the programming mode by following the instructions driver’s door closed; all doors will lock automatically. later in this section or program the next feature available Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was on your vehicle. programmed in Mode 3. The mode to which the vehicle Last Door Closed Locking and Lockout was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which your Prevention vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a This feature allows you to customize the automatic different mode, do the following: locking of the doors when exiting the vehicle. 1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming Programmable Modes Mode” listed previously. Mode 1: Both Features Off (Doors will always lock 2. Press LOCK on the power door lock switch. immediately when you press LOCK on the power 3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number door lock switch or the optional remote keyless of chimes indicates the vehicle’s current entry transmitter.) programmed mode. (If you do not wish to change the Mode 2: Lockout Deterrent Only (If you leave your key current mode, you can either exit the programming in the ignition with the driver’s door open, you won’t be mode by following the instructions later in this able to lock the doors with the power door locks.) section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.)

2-20 Mode 3: Last Door Closed Locking Only (If the power 4. Press UNLOCK to change the current mode. door lock switch or the optional remote keyless entry 5. Press UNLOCK until you hear the number of chimes transmitter is used to lock the vehicle while any door or corresponding to the mode selection you want. the liftgate is open, you will hear three chimes. The doors will not lock. Five seconds after the last door is The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit closed, all doors and the liftgate will lock.) the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available Mode 4: Both Features On (This combines on your vehicle. Modes 2 and 3.) Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was Remote Driver’s Unlock Control programmed in Mode 4. The mode to which the vehicle This feature allows you to customize the UNLOCK was programmed may have been changed since it left button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. the factory. To determine the mode to which your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a Programmable Modes different mode, do the following: Mode 1: Remote All Doors Unlock (When you press 1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming UNLOCK on your remote keyless entry transmitter, all Mode” listed previously. doors and the liftgate will unlock.) 2. Press UNLOCK on the power door lock switch. Mode 2: Remote Driver’s Door Unlock Only (When 3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number you press UNLOCK on your remote keyless entry of chimes indicates the vehicle’s current transmitter once, the driver’s door will unlock. When programmed mode. (If you do not wish to change the you press UNLOCK on your remote keyless entry current mode, you can either exit the programming transmitter again within five seconds, all doors and the mode by following the instructions later in this liftgate will unlock.) section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.)

2-21 Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was Remote Lock and Unlock Confirmation programmed in Mode 2. The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left This feature allows you to customize the feedback the factory. To determine the mode to which your received when locking or unlocking your vehicle with vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a the remote keyless entry transmitter. different mode, do the following: Programmable Modes 1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming Mode 1: Both Features Off (Remote lock and unlock Mode” listed previously. confirmation are disabled.) 2. Press UNLOCK on the remote keyless Mode 2: Exterior Lamps Flash Only entry transmitter. D When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to 3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number lock your vehicle, your parking lamps will flash to of chimes indicates the vehicle’s current let you know the command has been received. programmed mode. (If you do not wish to change the current mode, you can either exit the programming D When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to mode by following the instructions later in this unlock your vehicle or operate your optional power section or program the next feature available on sliding door(s), your parking lamps will flash to let your vehicle.) you know the command has been received. 4. Press UNLOCK to change the current mode. 5. Press UNLOCK until you hear the number of chimes corresponding to the mode selection you want. The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.

2-22 Mode 3: Exterior Lamps Flash and Horn Sound Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed in Mode 4. The mode to which the vehicle D When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to was programmed may have been changed since it left lock your vehicle, the horn will sound and your the factory. To determine the mode to which your parking lamps will flash to let you know the command has been received. vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a different mode, do the following: D When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock your vehicle or operate your optional power 1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming sliding door(s), your parking lamps will flash to let Mode” listed previously. you know the command has been received. 2. Press LOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter. Mode 4: Exterior Lamps Flash and Horn Sound 3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number (on second LOCK Press) of chimes indicates the vehicle’s current programmed D When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter mode. (If you do not wish to change the current to lock your vehicle, your parking lamps will flash mode, you can either exit the programming mode to let you know the command has been received. by following the instructions later in this section or The horn will sound and your parking lamps will program the next feature available on your vehicle.) flash if you press the LOCK button again within 4. Press LOCK to change the current mode. five seconds. 5. Press LOCK until you hear the number of chimes D When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to corresponding to the mode selection you want. unlock your vehicle or operate your optional power sliding door(s), your parking lamps will flash to let The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit you know the command has been received. the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.

2-23 Content Theft-Deterrent System Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed in Mode 4. The mode to which the vehicle This feature allows you to customize the damage was programmed may have been changed since it left detection on the vehicle. the factory. To determine the mode to which your Programmable Modes vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a different mode, do the following: Mode 1: Damage Detection with Reduced Sensitivity (If anyone seriously damages your vehicle or opens a 1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming door or the liftgate while your content theft-deterrent Mode” listed previously. system is armed, an alarm will sound and your parking 2. Turn the parking lamps on, then off. lamps will flash for up to two minutes.) 3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number Mode 2: Damage Detection Off (If anyone opens a door of chimes indicates the vehicle’s current programmed or the liftgate while your content theft-deterrent system mode. (If you do not wish to change the current is armed, an alarm will sound and your parking lamps mode, you can either exit the programming mode will flash for up to two minutes.) by following the instructions later in this section or Mode 3: Feature Off (Your content theft-deterrent program the next feature available on your vehicle.) system is always disarmed.) 4. Turn the parking lamps on, then off to change the Mode 4: Damage Detection with Normal Sensitivity current mode. (If anyone damages or enters your vehicle while your 5. Turn the parking lamps on, then off until you hear content theft-deterrent system is armed, an alarm will the number of chimes corresponding to the mode sound and your parking lamps will flash for up to selection you want. two minutes.) The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.

2-24 Arming and Disarming the Content While this mode provides increased security, it can be a Theft-Deterrent System problem if your remote keyless entry transmitter is damaged, lost or if it fails to operate for any reason This feature allows you to customize the arming and while the content theft-deterrent system is armed. The disarming of the content theft-deterrent system. content theft-deterrent system must be disarmed for the engine to run while in Mode 2; your key can no longer Programmable Modes disarm the system. Mode 1: Power Door Lock Switch Arming Off If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStarR system, D The system will arm when you lock the doors with OnStar will not be able to remotely unlock your vehicle your key or remote keyless entry transmitter. The if it has been programmed to Mode 2. key must be removed from the ignition when you Mode 3: Standard Arming and Disarming lock the doors or the content theft-deterrent system will not arm. D The system will arm when you lock the doors D using either power door lock switch while any door The system will disarm when you unlock the doors or the liftgate is open and the key is removed from with your key or remote keyless entry transmitter. the ignition. Mode 2: Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter D The system will arm when you lock the doors with Arm/Disarm Only your key or remote keyless entry transmitter and the D The system will arm when you lock the doors with key is removed from the ignition. your remote keyless entry transmitter. The key must D The system will disarm when you unlock the doors be removed from the ignition when you lock the doors with your key or remote keyless entry transmitter. or the content theft-deterrent system will not arm. D The system will disarm when you unlock the doors with your remote keyless entry transmitter.

2-25 Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was 4. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of programmed in Mode 1. The mode to which the vehicle chimes indicates the vehicle’s current programmed was programmed may have been changed since it left mode. (If you do not wish to change the current the factory. To determine the mode to which your mode, you can either exit the programming mode by vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a following the instructions later in this section or different mode, do the following: program the next feature available on your vehicle.) 1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming 5. Press the horn symbol to change the current mode. Mode” listed previously. 6. Press the horn symbol until you hear the number 2. Insert your spare key fully into any door key cylinder of chimes corresponding to the mode selection and turn it to the unlock position. you want. This step is necessary to prevent accidental 7. Remove your key from the door key cylinder. programming of this feature to Mode 2. Do not The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit program this feature to Mode 2 without first reading the programming mode by following the instructions the description for Mode 2 entirely. The door key next in this section or program the next feature available cylinder must remain in the unlock position during on your vehicle. Steps 2 through 4. 3. Press the horn symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.

2-26 Exiting Programming Mode Dual Sliding Doors To exit programming mode, turn the key from To open either sliding door from outside the vehicle, ACCESSORY to OFF and put the BCM PRGRM fuse pull the handle out and then pull the door toward the back into the instrument panel fuse block. rear. If you slide the door all the way back, the door will After programming a feature, you can exit the rest in a detent position. programming mode at anytime. Also, if your vehicle is To move the door forward, you must first pull the door equipped with the content-theft deterrent system, past the open detent position. remember to arm the system before exiting. The driver’s side sliding door is designed to open only a little if the fuel door is open. If this ever happens, don’t try to force the sliding door. Just close the driver’s side sliding door. Then when the fuel filler door is closed, the driver’s side sliding door can be opened normally.

2-27 Sliding Door Lock CAUTION:

If your vehicle is facing downward on a steep grade (15 percent or more), the door may not stay open and could slam shut, possibly injuring someone. To make sure the door does not slam shut, be sure to hold it open until everyone is clear of the door, and only then allow it to slowly close.

2-28 Power Sliding Door (Option) With this option, you can open and close the sliding door(s) using the switches inside of your vehicle. You can also operate the power sliding door(s) with your optional remote keyless entry transmitter. See “Remote Keyless Entry System” in the Index.

CAUTION:

Leaving young children or pets unattended in your vehicle can be dangerous. They could operate the power sliding door. A child or others Lock either sliding door from inside the vehicle by could be injured. Do not leave children or pets moving the manual lever down. Unlock it by moving unattended in your vehicle. the lever up. With power door locks, the sliding door lock has a delay To help avoid accidental operation of the sliding door(s), feature. See “Power Door Locks” and “Multifunction turn the power to the sliding door off by pressing the Alarm Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index. part of the power sliding door override switch with the symbol. If you have the optional dual power sliding doors, press the part of both power sliding door switches with the symbol to turn off the power to both sliding doors.

2-29 If you have the optional If you have the optional dual sliding doors, the left power sliding door, switch is for the driver’s side power sliding door and the this switch is located right switch is for the passenger’s side sliding door. The in the overhead power sliding door and the power sliding door override console switchbank. is one switch. Pressing the part of the switch(es) with the symbol turns the power to the sliding door(s) off. When the power sliding door(s) is off, you will not be able to open the door(s) in the following ways: D When using the power sliding door switch(es) located on the overhead console switchbank, D when using the switch in front of the driver’s or These switches are located passenger’s side sliding door, or in the overhead console D switchbank, if you have when using the optional remote keyless the optional dual power entry transmitter. sliding doors. NOTICE:

When your vehicle goes through an automatic car wash, be sure the power sliding door is turned off. If it isn’t, the power sliding door may open accidentally.

2-30 To open or close the sliding door(s), press and release This switch is located in one of the following power door switches. front of the driver’s or the passenger’s side sliding door.

The power sliding door override switch(es) will also stop the door(s) immediately, while the door(s) is opening or closing, when the override switch(es) is turned on. This switch(es) is located in the overhead console switchbank. The power sliding door(s) will only open if the transaxle is in PARK (P). The transaxle does not have to be in PARK (P) to close the door. If the power sliding door(s) is open or in the process of closing when you shift out of PARK (P), a buzzer will sound. This is a warning that the sliding door(s) is not completely closed. If the power to the sliding door(s) is turned off, the buzzer will not sound indicating the door(s) is not completely closed.

2-31 If an object obstructs the power sliding door while it is CAUTION: closing, the door will automatically reverse to the open position, provided it meets sufficient resistance. Resistance must be as strong as the force of the closing If you shift the transaxle out of PARK (P) and door, or stronger. The force of the closing door increases accelerate before the power sliding door latches significantly as the door approaches the latched position. closed, the door may reverse to the open position. The driver’s side sliding door is designed to open only a A child or others could fall out of the vehicle and little if the fuel door is open. If this ever happens, don’t be injured. Always make sure the power sliding try to force the sliding door. Just close the driver’s side door is closed and latched before you drive away. sliding door. Then when the fuel filler door is closed, the driver’s side sliding door can be opened normally.

CAUTION:

You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the sliding door. Make sure the door path is clear before closing the door.

If you want to open the power sliding door(s) when the override switch(es) is turned off, pull the inside or outside handle and let go. The door will open fully. To open the power sliding door(s) when the override switch(es) is on, pull the inside or outside handle and slide the door all the way back. 2-32 CAUTION:

If your vehicle is facing downward on a steep grade (15 percent or more), the door may not stay open and could slam shut, possibly injuring someone. To make sure the door does not slam shut, turn on the power sliding door feature. Then if the door closes, it will close under the control of the power door system.

If you want to close the power sliding door(s) when the override switch(es) is turned off, pull the inside or outside handle or the edge of the door. Move the door about 4 inches (10 cm) toward the closed position and release. The door will close completely and latch for you. To close the power sliding door(s) when the override switch(es) is turned on, pull the inside or outside handle and slide the door all the way forward to the latched position.

2-33 Sliding Door Security Lock To use the security lock, move the security lock lever all the way up and close the door from the outside. Your vehicle is equipped with a sliding door security lock that helps prevent young children or other If your vehicle has the optional power sliding door(s), passengers from opening the sliding door(s) using the you can override the security lock by pressing either inside door handle. power door switch when the power sliding door override switch is off. When the override switch(es) is turned on, The security lock lever is the power sliding door(s) cannot be opened from the located on the inside of each inside when the sliding door security lock is in use. sliding door, on the front edge of the door. If you want to open the sliding door(s) when the security lock is on, unlock and open the door from the outside. You should let adults and older children know how the security lock works, and how to cancel the lock. If you don’t, adults or older children who ride in the rear won’t be able to open the sliding door from the inside when the security lock feature is in use.

To access the lever, open the sliding door. Use the security lock label on the edge of the door as a guide.

2-34 Resetting the Power Sliding Door 4. Remove fuse 29 from the underhood fuse block. Leave it out for 30 seconds. The power sliding door may operate incorrectly or not at all because of the following conditions: 5. Reinstall the fuse and wait 10 seconds. D A low voltage or dead battery, 6. Turn the power sliding door override switch on. D disconnecting the battery, or 7. Press either of the power door buttons to open the power sliding door. D if the instrument panel PWR/HEATED SEAT PSD fuse or an underhood fuse 5, 27 or 29 is removed 8. Open the door. or blown. 9. Wait five seconds and close the door by pressing See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index for more either power door button. information about your fuse panel. 10. Wait five seconds and repeat Steps 7 through 9. If any of these conditions occur, the power sliding door If the door does not rest in the fully open position after will need to be reset. If your vehicle has the optional repeating Step 7, repeat Steps 7 through 9 again. If the dual power sliding doors, both doors will have to be door still does not operate correctly, see your dealer reset. To do this, follow the directions listed here. for service. It will be easier if you read through them once before beginning this procedure. Canceling the Sliding Door Security Lock 1. Check to be sure the power sliding door is unlocked 1. Unlock the sliding door and open the door from and securely closed. the outside. 2. Turn the ignition key to OFF. 2. Move the security lock lever all the way down. 3. If on, turn the power sliding door override The sliding door lock will now work normally. switch off.

2-35 Liftgate To unlock the liftgate from the outside, turn the key in CAUTION: the cylinder clockwise or use the optional remote keyless entry. To lock the liftgate using the key, turn the It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate key counterclockwise. open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can Open the liftgate using the handle located above the come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell license plate. Once slightly opened, the liftgate will rise CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. by itself. Lamps in the rear of the vehicle will come on, If you must drive with the liftgate open or if illuminating the rear cargo area. See “Interior Lamps” in electrical wiring or other cable connections the Index. must pass through the seal between the body and the liftgate: NOTICE: D Make sure all other windows are shut. D Turn the fan on your heating or cooling Be sure there are no overhead obstructions, such system to its highest speed with the setting as a garage door, before you open the liftgate. on vent and the outside air button pressed. You could slam the liftgate into something and That will force outside air into your vehicle. break the glass. See “Comfort Controls” in the Index. D If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel, open them all the way. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.

2-36 Theft Parking at Night Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight. features, we know that nothing we put on it can make Put them in a storage area, or take them with you. it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help. Parking Lots Even if you park in a lot where someone will be Key in the Ignition watching your vehicle, it’s still best to lock it up and If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an take your key. But what if you have to leave your key? easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so What if you have to leave something valuable in don’t do it. your vehicle? When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door, D Put your valuables in a storage area, like your you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key glove box. from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this. D If your vehicle has a remote keyless entry system, Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will your take the transmitter with you. ignition and transaxle. Also remember to lock the doors. D Lock all the doors except the driver’s.

2-37 Content Theft-Deterrent (Option) Once armed, the alarm will go off if someone tries to enter the vehicle (without using the remote keyless entry If your vehicle has this option, it has a theft-deterrent transmitter or a key), breaks a window, tries to damage alarm system. the vehicle or turns the ignition to ON. The horn will sound and the parking lamps will flash for up to two minutes. When the alarm is armed, the liftgate may be opened with the remote keyless entry transmitter or with a key. Arming with the Power Lock Switch Your alarm system will arm when you use either power door lock switch to lock the doors while any door or the liftgate is open and the key is removed from the ignition. If you would like to turn on power door lock switch arming, see “Multifunction Alarm Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index. The security light flashes quickly to let you know when the system is ready to arm with the power door lock A light located on top of your instrument panel (near the switches. The security light will stop flashing and stay center of the vehicle, next to the windshield) will flash on when you press the rear of the power door lock slowly to let you know that the system has been armed. switch, to let you know the system is arming. After all doors and the liftgate are closed and locked, the security While armed, the doors will not unlock with the power light will begin flashing at a very slow rate to let you door lock switch. know the system is armed.

2-38 Arming with the Remote Keyless Arming Confirmation Entry Transmitter If remote unlock confirmation is on, your parking lamps Your alarm system will arm when you use your remote will flash to let you know when your alarm system has keyless entry transmitter to lock the doors, if the key is disarmed. If you would not like the parking lamps to not in the ignition. The security light will turn on to let flash, see “Multifunction Alarm Locks and Lighting you know the system is arming. After all doors and the Choices” in the Index. liftgate are closed and locked, the security light will begin flashing at a very slow rate to let you know the Disarming with the Remote Keyless system is armed. Entry Transmitter Your alarm system will disarm when you use your Arming with Your Key remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the doors. Your alarm system will arm when you use your key to The security light will stop flashing to let you know the lock the doors. The security light will turn on to let you system is no longer armed. know the system is arming. After all doors and the liftgate are closed and locked, the security light will Disarming with Your Key begin flashing at a very slow rate to let you know the Your alarm system will disarm when you use your key system is armed. If you would like your key not to arm to unlock the doors. The security light will stop flashing the system, see “Multifunction Alarm Locks and to let you know the system is no longer armed. If you Lighting Choices” in the Index. would like your key not to disarm the alarm system, see “Multifunction Alarm Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index.

2-39 R Nuisance Alarms PASS-Key III If you experience nuisance alarms (alarms which are not Your vehicle is equipped caused by the opening of a door or the liftgate and are with the PASS-Key III not desirable), you may need to reduce the damage (Personalized Automotive detection sensitivity. Try programming the content Security System) theft deterrent to Mode 1. - theft-deterrent system. If you continue to experience nuisance alarms, you may PASS-Key III is a passive want to try turning off damage detection by theft-deterrent system. This programming your content theft-deterrent to Mode 2. means you don’t have to do If you are still having trouble with nuisance alarms, you anything different to arm or can turn off the content theft-deterrent system by disarm the system. It works programming your content theft-deterrent to Mode 3. when you insert or remove See “Multifunction Alarm Locks and Lighting Choices” the key from the ignition. in the Index for more information. See your dealer or qualified technician for service. Your PASS-Key III system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

2-40 This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to Operation is subject to the following two conditions: be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this you may also want to check the instrument panel PASS device must accept any interference received, including KEY fuse. If the engine still does not start with the other interference that may cause undesired operation of key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does the device. start, the first key may be faulty. See your dealer or a Changes or modifications to this system by other than an locksmith who can service the PASS-Key III to have authorized service facility could void authorization to a new key made. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in use this equipment. the Index. PASS-Key III uses a radio frequency transponder in the It is possible for the Pass-Key III decoder to learn the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle. transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up to 10 additional keys may be programmed for the vehicle. When the PASS-Key III system senses that someone is This procedure is for learning additional keys only. If all using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s starter the currently programmed keys are lost or do not and fuel systems. The starter will not work and fuel will operate, you must see your dealer or a locksmith who stop being delivered to the engine. Anyone using a can service PASS-Key III to have keys made and trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be programmed to the system. discouraged because of the high number of electrical key codes. See your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key III to get a new key blank that is cut If the engine does not start and the security message exactly as the ignition key that operates the system. comes on, the key may have a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off and try again.

2-41 Canadian Owners: If you lose or damage your keys, 5. The security message will turn off once the key has only a GM dealer can service PASS-Key III to have new been programmed. It may not be apparent that the keys made. To program additional keys you will need security message went on due to how quickly the key two current driver’s keys (black in color). You must add is programmed. a step to the following procedure. After Step 3 repeat 6. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to Steps 1 through 3 with the second current driver’s key. be programmed. Then continue with Step 4. If you are ever driving and the security message comes To program the new key: on and stays on, you will be able to restart your engine if 1. Verify the new key has PK3 stamped on it. you turn it off. Your PASS-Key III system, however, is 2. Insert the ignition key in the ignition and start the not working properly and must be serviced by your engine. If the engine will not start see your dealer dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by the for service. PASS-Key III system at this time. 3. After the engine has started, turn the key to OFF and If you lose or damage a PASS-Key III key, see your remove the key. dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key III to have a new key made. In an emergency, call Chevrolet 4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to RUN Roadside Assistance. See “Roadside Assistance” in the within 10 seconds of removing the previous key. Index for more information.

2-42 New Vehicle “Break-In” Ignition Positions With the key in the ignition, you can turn the key to NOTICE: five different positions.

Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate “break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines: D Don’t drive at any one speed -- fast or slow -- for the first 500 miles (805 km). Don’t make full-throttle starts. D Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time your new brake linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every time you get new brake linings. D Don’t tow a trailer during break-in. A (ACCESSORY): This is the position in which See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for you can operate your electrical accessories. Press in more information. the ignition switch as you turn the top of the key toward you.

2-43 B (LOCK): This is the only position in which you can D (RUN): This is the position to which the switch remove the key. This position locks your steering wheel, returns after you start your engine and release the ignition and transaxle. switch. The switch stays in RUN when the engine is running. But even when the engine is not running, you can use RUN to operate your electrical accessories, and NOTICE: to display some instrument panel warning lights. E (START): This position starts the engine. When the If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can’t engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if return to RUN for normal driving. so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the If the engine is not running, ACCESSORY and RUN steering wheel left and right while you turn the are positions that allow you to operate your electrical key hard. Turn the key only with your hand. accessories, such as the radio. Using a tool to force it could break the key or the ignition switch. If none of this works, then your Retained Accessory Power (RAP) vehicle needs service. With RAP, the power windows (option), the power rear quarter windows (if equipped), audio system and the C (OFF): This position unlocks the steering wheel, optional electronic level control (ELC) will continue to ignition and transaxle, but does not send power to any work up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to accessories. Use this position if your vehicle must be OFF and none of the doors are opened. pushed or towed, but never try to push-start your vehicle. A warning chime will sound if you open the driver’s door when the ignition is off and the key is in the ignition.

2-44 Starting Your Engine NOTICE: Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving, Holding your key in START for longer than use NEUTRAL (N) only. 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor. Wait about NOTICE: 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter. Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the 2. If the engine doesn’t start in 10 seconds, push the transaxle. Shift to PARK (P) only when your accelerator pedal about one-quarter of the way down vehicle is stopped. while you turn the key to START. Do this until the engine starts. As soon as it does, let go of the key. 1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine warms up.

2-45 3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped) stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for a maximum of 15 seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. If the engine still won’t start or starts briefly but then stops again, repeat Step 1 or 2, depending on temperature. When the engine starts, release the key and the accelerator pedal.

NOTICE:

Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way In very cold weather, 0_F ( 18_C) or colder, the engine the engine operates. Before adding electrical - coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t, better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, your engine might not perform properly. the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. At temperatures above 32_F (0_C), use of the coolant heater is not required.

2-46 To Use the Engine Coolant Heater How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the 1. Turn off the engine. kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact electrical cord is located on the driver’s side of the your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your engine compartment. vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area. 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet. Automatic Transaxle Operation CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a Maximum engine speed is limited when you’re in heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), to protect driveline at least 15 amps. components from improper operation.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged.

2-47 There are several different positions for your shift lever. PARK (P): This gear position locks your front wheels. CAUTION: It’s the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle can’t move easily. It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. transaxle shift lock control system. You have to fully Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is apply your regular brakes before you can shift from running unless you have to. If you have left the PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN. As you step on the brake pedal, while in PARK (P), you may hear a engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. click from the solenoid of the system. This ensures that You or others could be injured. To be sure your the system is operating properly. vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on move the shift lever to PARK (P). the shift lever -- push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. move the shift lever into the gear you wish. See If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” “Shifting Out of PARK (P)” in this section. in the Index.

2-48 REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up. CAUTION: NOTICE: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is your engine is “racing” (running at high speed) is moving forward could damage your transaxle. dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle brake pedal, your vehicle could move very is stopped. rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing. To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see “Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index. NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already NOTICE: moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed. Damage to your transaxle caused by shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.

2-49 AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is Warm-Up Shift for normal driving. If you need more power for passing, Your vehicle has a computer controlled transaxle and you’re: designed to warm up the engine faster when the outside D Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push your temperature is 35_F (2_C) or colder. You may notice accelerator pedal about halfway down. that the transaxle will shift at a higher vehicle speed D Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the until the engine is warmed up. This is a normal accelerator all the way down. condition designed to provide heat to the passenger compartment and defrost the windows more quickly. You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power. See “Comfort Controls, Heating” in the Index for more information. NOTICE: THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving, but it offers more power and lower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D). If your vehicle seems to start up rather slowly, or if it seems not to shift gears as you go faster, Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3) something may be wrong with a transaxle system instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): sensor. If you drive very far that way, your D When driving on hilly, winding roads. vehicle can be damaged. So, if this happens, have D When towing a trailer (so there is less shifting your vehicle serviced right away. Until then, you between gears). can use SECOND (2) when you are driving less D than 35 mph (55 km/h) and AUTOMATIC When going down a steep hill. OVERDRIVE (D) for higher speeds.

2-50 SECOND (2): This position gives you more power, but lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. NOTICE: It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to use If your vehicle seems to start up rather slowly, or your brakes off and on. if it seems not to shift gears as you go faster, something may be wrong with a transaxle system NOTICE: sensor. If you drive very far that way, your vehicle can be damaged. So, if this happens, have Don’t drive in SECOND (2) for more than your vehicle serviced right away. Until then, you 25 miles (40 km), or at speeds over 55 mph can use SECOND (2) when you are driving less (90 km/h), or you can damage your transaxle. than 35 mph (55 km/h) and THIRD (3) for Use THIRD (3) or AUTOMATIC higher speeds. OVERDRIVE (D) as much as possible. Don’t shift into SECOND (2) unless you are going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h) or you can damage your engine.

2-51 FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power Parking Brake (but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the The parking brake is located shift lever is put in FIRST (1), the transaxle won’t on the driver’s side under downshift into first gear until the vehicle is going the instrument panel. slow enough.

NOTICE:

If your front wheels can’t turn, don’t try to drive. This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object. You could damage your transaxle. Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal your vehicle there with only the accelerator down with your right foot and push down on the parking pedal. This could overheat and damage the brake pedal with your left foot. transaxle. Use your brakes or shift into PARK (P) If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light to hold your vehicle in position on a hill. will come on. See “Brake System Warning Light” in the Index.

2-52 To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake Shifting Into PARK (P) pedal down with your right foot while you push down on the parking brake pedal with your left foot. (To release the tension on the parking brake cable, you will CAUTION: need to apply about the same amount of pressure to the parking brake pedal as you did when you set the parking brake.) When you remove your foot from the parking It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if brake pedal, it will pop up to the released position. the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can NOTICE: move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when Driving with the parking brake on can cause you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to follow. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a replace them, and you could also damage other Trailer” in the Index. parts of your vehicle.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill, set the parking brake with your left foot. see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.

2-53 2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:

D Move the lever up as far as it will go. 3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK. D Pull the lever toward you. 4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

2-54 Leaving Your Vehicle With the Torque Lock Engine Running If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in CAUTION: the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift engine running. Your vehicle could move into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) the Index. with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of overheat and even catch fire. You or others could PARK (P) before you release the parking brake. be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another engine running unless you have to. vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).

2-55 Shifting Out of PARK (P) If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever by pushing it all the way into PARK (P) Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock as you maintain brake application. Then try to move the control system. You have to fully apply your regular shift lever into the gear you want. If you ever hold the brakes before you can shift from PARK (P), when the brake pedal down but still can’t shift out of PARK (P), ignition is in RUN. try this: As you step on the brake pedal, while in PARK (P), you 1. Turn the ignition key to OFF. may hear a click from the solenoid of the system. This ensures that the system is operating properly. See 2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4. “Automatic Transaxle Operation” in the Index. 3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N). 4. Start the engine and then shift to the drive gear you want. 5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.

2-56 Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust

CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death. You might have exhaust coming in if: D Your exhaust system sounds strange or different. D Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. D Your vehicle was damaged in a collision. D Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris. D Repairs weren’t done correctly. D Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modified improperly. CAUTION: If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle: Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust D Drive it only with all the windows down to parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park blow out any CO; and over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that D Have your vehicle fixed immediately. can burn.

2-57 Running Your Engine While You’re Parked CAUTION: It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here are some things to know. It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. CAUTION: Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you’ve left the Idling the engine with the climate control engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. system off could allow dangerous exhaust into You or others could be injured. To be sure your your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly “Engine Exhaust.” level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P). Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if the fan is at the highest setting. One place this Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t can happen is a garage. Exhaust -- with move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. CO -- can come in easily. NEVER park in a If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in garage with the engine running. the Index. Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See “Blizzard” in the Index. Horn You can sound the horn by pressing the horn symbols on your steering wheel.

2-58 Tilt Wheel Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive. You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle. The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is located on the left side of the steering column. To tilt the wheel, hold the wheel and pull the lever. Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place.

The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following: D Turn and Lane-Change Signals D Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer D Flash-to-Pass Feature D Windshield Wipers D Windshield Washer D Cruise Control (Option) 2-59 Turn and Lane-Change Signals As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrow flashes faster than normal, a signal bulb may be burned The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal. downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change. If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down. signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and check the When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically. fuse. See “Bulb Replacement” and “Fuses and Circuit An arrow on the instrument Breakers” in the Index. panel cluster will flash in If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for the direction of the turn or the trailer lamps, the signal indicator will flash at a lane change. normal rate even if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make sure they are working. Turn Signal on Chime To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever If either turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 mile until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you (1.2 km), a chime will sound to let the driver know to complete your lane change. The lever will return by turn it off. itself when you release it. If you need to leave the signal on for more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km), turn off the signal and then turn it back on.

2-60 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer MIST: Turn the band to MIST for a single wiping cycle. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go. The To change the headlamps from high to low beam, or low wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more wipes, to high, simply pull the turn signal lever all the way hold the band on mist longer. toward you. Then release it. OFF: Turn the band to OFF to turn off the When the high beams windshield wipers. are on, this light on the LOW: Turn the band to LOW, for steady wiping at instrument panel cluster will also be on. low speed. HIGH: Turn the band to HIGH, for steady wiping at high speed. DELAY: Turn the band away from you to one of the five sensitivity settings between OFF and LOW, to Your fog lamps will turn off when you switch to high choose the delayed wiping cycle. The further the band is beams. Using your high beams in fog is not recommended. turned toward LOW, the shorter the delay will be. Use Flash-to-Pass Feature this setting for light rain or snow. When the headlamps are off, pull the lever toward you Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent you to momentarily switch on the high beams (to signal that from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid you are going to pass). When you release the lever, they damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper will turn off. blades before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If your Windshield Wipers blades do become damaged, get new blades or blade inserts. To operate the windshield wipers turn the band marked WIPER, located on the multifunction lever, Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. A circuit upward or downward. breaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload. 2-61 Windshield Washer Rear Window Washer/ Wiper (If Equipped) To wash your windshield, press and hold the windshield The rear window washer paddle. The washers and wipers will operate. wiper switch is located When you release the paddle, the washers will stop, and in the instrument the wipers will continue to operate for two cycles, unless panel switchbank. your wipers had already been on. In that case, the wipers will resume the wiper speed you had selected earlier.

CAUTION:

In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking Press the wiper symbol on the bottom of the switch to your vision. turn on the intermittent wiper. To turn off the wiper, gently press the top of the switch. To wash and wipe the rear window, press in the washer symbol on the top of the switch. Washer fluid will run down the glass as long as the switch is held in. When the top of the switch is released, the wiper will continue to cycle three more times. There is only one windshield washer fluid reservoir for the front and rear windshield wipers. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index.

2-62 To wash the rear window when the rear wiper is already on, press on the top of the switch with the wash CAUTION: symbol on it. Press in the bottom of the switch to continue the intermittent wiper cycle after the washing cycle is completed. D Cruise control can be dangerous where you can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So, Cruise Control (Option) don’t use your cruise control on winding With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about roads or in heavy traffic. 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on D Cruise control can be dangerous on the accelerator. This can really help on long trips. slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes Cruise control does not work at speeds below about in tire traction can cause needless wheel 25 mph (40 km/h). spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t use cruise control on slippery roads. When you apply your brakes, the cruise control disengages. If your vehicle is in cruise control when the optional traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage. See “Traction Control System” in the Index. When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the cruise control back on.

2-63 Setting Cruise Control

CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control switch on when you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button and go into cruise when you don’t want to. You could be startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control.

1. Move the cruise control switch to ON. 2. Get up to the speed you want. 3. Press in the SET button at the end of the lever and release it. 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

2-64 Resuming a Set Speed Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed There are two ways to go to a higher speed: and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off D Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed. the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it. Once Press the SET button at the end of the lever, then you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you can release the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll move the cruise control switch from ON to R/A now cruise at the higher speed. (resume/accelerate) briefly. D Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and there until you get up to the speed you want, and stay there. then release the switch. (To increase your speed in If you hold the switch at R/A, the vehicle will keep very small amounts, move the switch to R/A briefly going faster until you release the switch or apply the and then release it. Each time you do this, your brake. So, unless you want to go faster, don’t hold the vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.) switch at R/A. The accelerate feature will work whether or not you have set an initial cruise control speed.

2-65 Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control Using Cruise Control on Hills There are two ways to reduce speed while using How well your cruise control will work on hills depends cruise control: upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills. D Press in the SET button at the end of the lever until When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the you reach the lower speed you want, then release it. accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear D To slow down in very small amounts, press the to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake SET button briefly. Each time you do this, you’ll takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower. be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on steep hills. Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When Ending Cruise Control you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow There are two ways to turn off the cruise control: down to the cruise control speed you set earlier. D Step lightly on the brake pedal, or D move the cruise switch to OFF. Erasing Cruise Speed Memory When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your cruise control set speed memory is erased.

2-66 Exterior Lamps The control to the left of the steering column operates the exterior lamps. (Off/Auto): Turning the control to this setting will activate the automatic headlamps when it is dark enough outside and turn off all the lamps and lights during the day except the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL). (Parking Lamps): Turning the control to this setting turns on the parking lamps together with the following: D Sidemarker Lamps D Taillamps D Instrument Panel Lights (Headlamps): Turning the control to this setting turns on the headlamps, together with the previously listed lamps and lights. Lamps on Reminder If the driver’s door is opened and you turn the ignition to OFF or LOCK while leaving the lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.

2-67 Daytime Running Lamps / Automatic To idle your vehicle with the DRL and automatic Headlamp Control headlamps off, set the parking brake while the ignition is in OFF or LOCK. Then start the vehicle. The DRL and Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for automatic headlamps will stay off until you release the others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. parking brake. DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular short periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully headlamp system when you need it. functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada. Interior Lamps A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the Instrument Panel Brightness Control DRL work, so be sure it isn’t covered. The DRL system This feature controls the brightness of the instrument will make front parking and turn signal lamps come on panel lights. in daylight when the following conditions are met: The thumbwheel for this feature is located below the D The ignition is on, exterior lamps control. D the exterior lamps control is off, and Turn the thumbwheel to the right to brighten the lights D the parking brake is released. or to the left to dim them. Turn the thumbwheel all the way to the left to turn off the instrument panel lights. When the DRL are on, only your front parking and turn signal lamps will be on. Your instrument panel won’t be Interior Lamps Control lit up. Turn the thumbwheel all the way to the right to turn on When it’s dark enough outside, the exterior lamps will the interior lamps, if the interior lamps override switch come on automatically. When it’s bright enough outside, is off. Turn the thumbwheel to the left to turn the the exterior lamps will turn off and the DRL will turn lamps off. on. Of course, you may still turn on the headlamps any time you need to. 2-68 Interior Lamps Override Switch Illuminated Entry This switch is located With illuminated entry, the interior of your vehicle is in the overhead illuminated so you can see inside before you enter your console switchbank. vehicle. The lamps will come on for 40 seconds if you unlock your door using your key or the optional remote keyless entry transmitter and the ignition is in LOCK or OFF. After 40 seconds have passed, the interior lamps will slowly fade out. The lamps will turn off before the 40 seconds if you do one of the following: D Lock all the doors using the key, D press LOCK on the power door lock switch, or D press LOCK on the optional remote keyless entry transmitter. Press the symbol on the switch to override control of the interior lamps and turn off power to the reading lamps, When any door is opened, illuminated entry is cancelled. visor vanity lamps (if equipped) and glove box lamp. The interior lamps will stay on while any door or the This feature allows you to have the lamps off when any liftgate is open, and slowly fade out when all doors and door is open. the liftgate are closed. Press the textured part of the interior lamps override The interior lamps may stay on for up to 25 seconds switch to turn power back on to the interior lamps. This after all doors have been closed if they have not been will allow the lamps to stay on when any door is open. locked. See “Delayed Illumination” later in this section. To turn the exit lighting feature off or on, see “Multifunction Alarm Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index.

2-69 Delayed Illumination Exit Lighting The delayed illumination feature will continue to With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on for illuminate the interior for 25 seconds after all doors have about 25 seconds whenever you remove the key from been closed so that you can find your ignition and the ignition. If you turn the ignition key to RUN or buckle your safety belt at night. Delayed illumination ACCESSORY, the lamps will fade out. The lamps will not occur while the ignition is in RUN or will also fade out if you lock the doors with the power ACCESSORY. After 25 seconds have passed, the door lock switch or the optional remote keyless interior lamps will slowly fade out. The lamps will fade entry transmitter. out before the 25 seconds have passed if you do one of When any door is opened, exit lighting is cancelled. The the following: interior lamps will stay on while any door or the liftgate D Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY, is open, and slowly fade out when all doors and the D lock all doors using the optional remote keyless liftgate are closed. entry transmitter, or The interior lamps may stay on for up to 25 seconds D lock all the doors using the power door lock switch after all doors have been closed if they have not been or the key. locked. See “Delayed Illumination” earlier in this section. To turn the delayed illumination feature off or on, see “Multifunction Alarm Locks and Lighting Choices” in To turn the exit lighting feature off or on, see the Index. “Multifunction Alarm Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index.

2-70 Front Reading Lamps Rear Reading Lamps There are two reading lamps in the third row headliner, above the outboard seating positions. To turn on or off either reading lamp, press the lens of the lamp. If your vehicle does not have dual sliding doors, there is also a reading lamp in the second row, integrated within the dome lamp. To turn on or off either reading lamp, press the button next to the lamp lens. The rear reading lamps will not turn on if the interior lamps override switch is on. See “Interior Lamps Override Switch” in the Index.

There are two reading lamps in the overhead console. To turn either reading lamp on or off, press the lens of the lamp. These lamps will come on each time you open a door, unless you turn on the interior lamps override feature. See “Interior Lamps Override Switch” in the Index.

2-71 Dome Lamp Battery Saver The dome lamp is located in the center of your vehicle Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent you from and has two buttons to manually turn on and off the draining the battery, in case you accidentally leave the lamp. The dome lamp will come on each time you open interior lamps on. If you leave any interior lamps on a door, unless you turn on the interior lamps override while the ignition is in LOCK or OFF, they will feature. See “Interior Lamps Override Switch” in automatically turn off after 10 minutes. The lamps won’t the Index. come back on again until you do one of the following: Cargo Lamp D Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY, D The cargo lamp is located in the rear of your vehicle, turn the interior lamps thumbwheel all the way to above the liftgate opening, and does not have a switch. the right, then slightly back to the left, or The cargo lamp will come on each time you open a D open (or close and reopen) a door that is closed. door, unless you turn on the interior lamps override. See “Interior Lamps Override Switch” in the Index. If your vehicle has less than 15 miles (25 km) on the odometer, the battery saver will turn off the lamps after only three minutes.

2-72 Mirrors Turn the control counterclockwise to select the driver’s side rearview mirror, or clockwise to select the Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror passenger’s side rearview mirror. Then use the control to adjust each mirror so that you can see a little of the To reduce glare from lights behind you, pull the lever side of your vehicle and the area beside and behind toward you (to the night position). To return the mirror your vehicle when you are sitting in a comfortable to the day position, press the lever away from you. driving position. Power Remote Control Rearview Mirrors If you are not adjusting either mirror, leave the control in the center off position. This prevents moving the The control, located on the mirrors accidentally once you have them adjusted. driver’s door, operates both outside rearview mirrors. Both outside mirrors can be folded forward or rearward. In the rearward position, they will fold almost flush with the vehicle. This feature is particularly useful in automatic car washes. Your mirrors have a blue tint to reduce glare while driving at night.

2-73 Convex Outside Mirror Heated Outside Mirrors (If Equipped) Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex The outside rearview mirrors are heated when you mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the activate the rear window defogger. See “Rear Window driver’s seat. Defogger” in the Index. Storage Compartments CAUTION: Your vehicle’s large carrying capacity can store many items. If you have the extended wheelbase version, you i i A convex mirror can make things (like other can carry things as large as a 4 x 8 piece of plywood. vehicles) look farther away than they really are. You can also use the floor pins that are used to attach the seats, to secure larger loads. If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.

2-74 Glove Box Compact Overhead Console (Canada Only) Your vehicle has a glove box below the instrument panel. To open the glove box, lift the latch release. Use the key to lock or unlock the glove box. The glove box door has a detent to prevent the door from lowering too far. Open the glove box until the door is partway open, then pull the door down if you need it fully open. To close the glove box, the door must be pressed up past the detent. In the door of the glove box, you will find a tissue pack holder and clip for a pen or pencil.

The front overhead console includes two reading lamps, a storage compartment and a switchbank.

2-75 Overhead Console (Option) Garage Door Opener Compartment You can store your garage door opener in the rear compartment of your overhead console, and operate it from this position. To install your garage door opener, follow these instructions: 1. Open the compartment by pressing the latch forward. 2. Peel the protective backing from the hook and loop fastener and press it firmly to the back of your garage door opener.

The optional front overhead console has reading lamps, a switchbank, storage compartments, a garage door opener compartment, OnStarR System buttons, an optional Driver Information Center (DIC) and optional HomeLinkR Transmitter buttons. If your vehicle has the HomeLink transmitter buttons, they will take the place of the garage door opener compartment. The garage door opener compartment is explained next. For information on the other features listed, see each of them in the Index. 2-76 3. Line up the button of the garage door opener with Storage Bin one of the four buttons on the compartment door. Make sure the garage door opener button is facing At the base of the center instrument panel console, there down and press the opener firmly into place. is a storage bin. To open the bin, lift the latch release and the door will fold down. 4. Once the opener is installed, use the black pegs inside the compartment door to make sure the lined area on Inside the bin, you will find a tray that slides out. Slide the compartment door will contact the control button the tray all the way toward the rear of the vehicle until on your garage door opener when pressed. the tray locks onto the plastic tabs at the end of the guide rails. The tray can hold CDs or cassettes in the center area. You can also store cassettes in the left and right side area. The tray can be removed for cleaning or when you want to replace the selection of CDs or cassettes. Slide the tray back into the storage bin before closing the bin door. The tray can also be placed in the glove box for locked storage if desired.

5. Add one peg at a time until your garage door opener operates with the compartment door closed when you press the button. 2-77 Removing and Replacing the Tray To remove the tray, slide it almost all the way out. Don’t let the tray lock over the plastic tabs at the end of the guide rails (A). Lift the tray out of the guide rails. The rubber mat under the tray also lifts out for cleaning. When the rubber mat is put back in, be sure the tabs at the back of the mat are seated in the slots at the back of the storage bin. The dividers in the tray can be removed by squeezing the plastic tabs on the bottom of the dividers, while pulling up. Put the dividers back in by sliding them down until the tabs click into place. To reinstall the tray, line up the guides on the bottom of the tray with the guide rails in the storage bin door. Slide the tray back in.

2-78 Front Seat Storage Bin Convenience Net (Option) The storage bin is located under the manual front The optional convenience net is designed to help passenger’s seat. To open the bin, lift the handle and keep small loads, like grocery bags, from falling over slide the drawer out. during sharp turns or quick stops and starts. Install the convenience net at the rear of your vehicle, inside Cupholders the liftgate. There are cupholders located below the instrument panel To use the convenience net, do the following: switchbank. The cupholders have removeable liners for larger size cups and for cleaning the cupholders. To use the cupholders, simply pull out the tray. Keep the tray stowed in when not in use. Rear Storage Compartments and Cupholders Your vehicle has a storage compartment and may have a cupholder on the driver’s side of the vehicle, next to the third row seat(s). Your vehicle also has cupholders on the bottom inboard side of the second row captain’s chairs (if equipped). The seatbacks have cupholders that can be used when the seatbacks are folded forward. 1. Attach the upper loops to the posts on either side of the liftgate opening (the label on the net should be in the upper left corner).

2-79 2. Attach the lower hooks to the metal rings on the floor. 3. Once you’ve loaded items into the net, stretch the higher side of the net up and over the top of the load to hold it firmly in place. (The side of the convenience net closest to the front of the vehicle is higher than the side closest to the liftgate.) The convenience net has a maximum capacity of 100 lbs. (45 kg). It is not designed to hold larger, heavier loads. Store such loads on the floor of your vehicle, as far forward as you can. When not in use, it is recommended that you take down the convenience net to extend the life of the net and help retain the elasticity, and to keep the rear exit clear. Store the net in the pouch behind either front seat or in one of the side convenience nets.

2-80 Side Convenience Nets Front Seat Storage Net The side convenience nets are designed to hold smaller items (about 8 lbs. (4 kg)) than the large convenience net.

There is a storage net that stretches between the front seats. Pull the hooks toward the passenger’s seat and Attach the loops to the posts on the rear side panels, near insert them into the holes. the jack storage area. To store the net, lift the hooks up and out of the holes. When not in use, it is recommended that you take The net does not detach from the driver’s seat. down the convenience nets to extend their life and When not in use, it is recommended that you unhook the retain their elasticity. net to extend its life and retain its elasticity.

2-81 Convenience Center (Option) Removing the Convenience Center 1. Make sure that all items are off of the convenience center and that it is empty. CAUTION: 2. Turn the hand knob counterclockwise until the knob is loose. If the convenience center isn’t secured properly, it can move around in a collision or sudden stop. 3. Lift up on the hand knob to grab a hold of the convenience center. People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to secure the convenience center properly. 4. Lift up on the convenience center while pulling it toward you and pull it out.

The convenience center comes with the optional Replacing the Convenience Center stowable seat. It provides extra storage space for the rear 1. Make sure the stowable seat is properly installed in of the vehicle. the vehicle. See “Stowable Seat” in the Index for To open the convenience center, pull up on the door more information. If the stowable seat is not in the latch located in the front. The convenience center cover vehicle with the convenience center, the convenience has two automatic prop rods to hold it up and in place. center will not be locked into the correct position in the vehicle. To close the convenience center cover you must pull one of the prop rod linkages toward you while holding onto 2. Make sure that the convenience center is closed. the door latch and lower the convenience center cover to 3. Lift the convenience center up and into the rear of close it. the vehicle.

2-82 The tray sill can be folded down onto the stowable seat to close the space between the two when the stowable seat is folded down. To do this, flip the sill plate up and over toward the stowable seat. The cover of the convenience center can be left in its upright position while the vehicle is moving. The convenience center has six hooks on the inside cover for hanging items on. The prop rods can hold up to 49 lbs. (21.8 kg) on the cover of the convenience center while in the upright position. The convenience center and the stowable seat both have a maximum weight capacity of 400 lbs. (181.6 kg).

4. Put the tray sill, located on the back of the NOTICE: convenience center, to the upright position. 5. Slide the convenience center in and align it so that Your warranty does not cover parts or the forks, located on the bottom rear of the components that fail because of overloading. convenience center, slide into the seat anchors. 6. Press down on the front of the convenience center so the center locates on the sill mounting bracket. 7. Turn the hand knob clockwise until the knob is tight. 8. Pull up on the convenience center to make sure it is locked into place.

2-83 Luggage Carrier (Option)

CAUTION:

If you try to carry something on top of your vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage carrier -- like paneling, plywood, a mattress, and so forth -- the wind can catch it as you drive along. This can cause you to lose control. What you are carrying could be violently torn off, and this could cause you or other drivers to have a collision, and of course damage your vehicle. You may be able to carry something like this inside. If you have the optional luggage carrier, you can load But, never carry something longer or wider than things on top of your vehicle. The luggage carrier has the luggage carrier on top of your vehicle. side rails attached to the roof, as well as sliding crossrails and places to use for tying things down. These let you load some things on top of your vehicle, as long as they are not wider or longer than the luggage carrier.

2-84 Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle capacity and loading, see “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index. To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving, check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier and cargo are still securely fastened. Your luggage carrier has release knobs set in the ends of each crossrail.

NOTICE:

Loading cargo that weighs more than 150 lbs. (68 kg) on the luggage carrier may damage Turn the release knobs counterclockwise to unlock the your vehicle. crossrails. Slide the crossrails forward or back, as When you carry cargo on the luggage carrier of a needed, to accommodate loads of various sizes. proper size and weight, put it as far forward as you can. Then slide the crossrail up against the rear of the load, to help keep it from moving. You can then tie it down.

2-85 After repositioning the crossrails, be sure to tighten the Sun Visors release knobs by turning them clockwise. This will lock the crossrails in place. To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You can also remove them from the center mount and swing Use the tie-down loops on them to the side. the slider to help secure large loads. Visor Vanity Mirrors Pull down the sun visor. Flip up the cover to expose the vanity mirror. Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors (If Equipped) Pull down the sun visor. Flip up the cover to expose the vanity mirror. The lamps will come on when you open the cover.

2-86 Accessory Inflator System (Option) The air inflator kit is stored in the glove box. It includes a 20-foot (6 m) hose with an air pressure gage and Your vehicle may have an air inflator. With it, you can nozzle adapters. inflate things like air mattresses and basketballs, and you can also use it to bring your tires up to the proper pressure. CAUTION: The air inflator is located in the rear compartment on the driver’s side. To remove the cover, pull the tab on the Inflating something too much can make it cover and pull it off. explode, and you or others could be injured. Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and inflate any object only to its recommended pressure.

2-87 4. Remove the protective cap covering the outlet. 5. Attach the other end of the hose to the outlet. 6. Press the ON switch. If the air inflator system does not turn on, the fuse may be blown or installed incorrectly. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index or see your dealer for service. Your air inflator will automatically shut off after about 10 minutes. To reset, press the ON switch again. Don’t run your air inflator for longer than 30 minutes at one time. If you do, you may damage the system. After 30 minutes, wait at least 10 minutes before restarting the air inflator. The switch and outlet for the air inflator system are To turn off the inflator, do the following: located in the rear compartment on the driver’s side next 1. Press OFF and detach the hose, first from the to the accessory power outlet. inflated object, then from the outlet. To use your air inflator system, do the following: 2. Put the protective cap back on. 1. Turn the ignition key to ACCESSORY or RUN. 3. Place the inflator kit tools in the pouch, and store in 2. Attach the appropriate nozzle adapter, if required, to the glove box. the end of the hose that has the pressure gage. To put the cover back on, line up the tabs at the back of 3. Attach that end of the hose to the object you wish the cover and put it in place. Push down the tab to to inflate. secure the cover.

2-88 Accessory Power Outlets To remove the cover, pull the tab on the cover and pull it off. To put the cover back on the rear accessory power With accessory power outlets you can plug in auxiliary outlet, line up the tabs at the back of the cover and put electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or the cover in place. Push down the tab to secure the CB radio. cover. When not in use, always cover the rear accessory The front accessory power outlets are located below power outlet with the protective cap. the cupholders. Pull the cover down to use the power outlet. When not NOTICE: in use, keep the cover on. When using the accessory power outlet: D Maximum load of any electrical equipment should not exceed 20 amps. D Be sure to turn off any electrical equipment when not in use. Leaving electrical equipment on for extended periods can drain the battery.

Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible with the accessory power outlet and could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem see your dealer for additional information on accessory power outlets. The rear accessory power outlet is located in the rear compartment on the driver’s side next to the air inflator system. 2-89 OnStarR System (If Equipped) NOTICE: OnStar is a vehicle communications system that offers a variety of services and provides a one-touch hands-free Adding some electrical equipment to your vehicle communication link between you and the OnStar Center. can damage it or keep other things from working To receive OnStar services, a service subscription as they should. This wouldn’t be covered by your agreement is required and an additional fee may be warranty. Check with your dealer before adding required. Services are available 24 hours a day, 7 days a electrical equipment, and never use anything that week. For more information, call 1-888-ONSTAR-7 exceeds the amperage rating. (1-888-667-8277).

When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with the equipment.

NOTICE:

Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs OnStar Services Button: Press this button once to only. Do not hang any type of accessory or contact an advisor who will be able to assist you with accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of these services. If you are not quickly connected, the the power outlet can cause damage not covered system will automatically reset and redial. This ensures by your warranty. connection to the center; there is no additional action required. Press the Communication button to cancel the automatic redial.

2-90 Emergency Button: In an emergency situation, Telltale Light: This light will indicate the status of press the emergency service button. Upon receiving the the system. A solid green light will come on when you call, an advisor at the center will locate your vehicle and start the vehicle to let you know that the system is on assess the situation. If necessary, the advisor will alert and is ready to make or receive calls. the nearest emergency service provider. If the light blinks green it means that an incoming or Communication Button: Press this button at outgoing call is in progress. Press the Communication button if you notice the light blinking and you are not the end of a call. Also press this button to answer a call on a call. from the center, or cancel a call if one of the other buttons is accidentally pressed. This button is also The light will be red in the event of an OnStar system used to access OnStar Personal Calling and Virtual malfunction. If this occurs press the OnStar Services Advisor services. See the OnStar owner package for button to attempt to contact an advisor. If the connection more information. is made, the advisor will assist you with steps to take to make sure that the system is functioning properly. If you Volume Control: You can control the volume of the cannot contact the advisor, take your vehicle to your OnStar System using the volume knob on the radio. dealership as soon as possible for assistance. Cellular Antenna: The cellular antenna on the outside of your vehicle is critical to effective communications using the OnStar system. Optimum cellular reception can be obtained when the mast is straight up and down.

2-91 OnStar Services D Remote Diagnostics: If an instrument panel light comes on, press the OnStar Services button. The following services are available within OnStar An advisor can perform a check of the engine service plans. Your vehicle comes with a specific on-board computer, and recommend what action one-year service plan than allows use of some or all of needs to be taken. the following services. D D OnStar MED-NET: Med-Net can store your Automatic Notification of Air Bag personal medical history and provide it to emergency Deployment: If an air bag deploys, a priority personnel if necessary. (Requires activation and emergency signal is automatically sent to the center. additional fee.) An advisor will locate your vehicle’s position, try to contact you and assist you in the situation. If the D Accident Assist: An advisor can provide center is unable to contact you, an emergency service step-by-step guidance following an accident. provider will be contacted. D Remote Door Unlock: To contact the center, call D Stolen Vehicle Tracking: Call the center at 1-888-4-ONSTAR. You will be required to provide 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) to report your your security information. An advisor will send a vehicle stolen. The system can then attempt to locate command to your vehicle to unlock itself. The and track your vehicle and the advisor will assist the advisor can delay unlocking your vehicle. Remote proper authorities. Door Unlock is disabled 48 hours after the vehicle is parked to maintain the battery charge. D Roadside Assistance with Location: For vehicle breakdowns, press the OnStar Services button. An D Vehicle Locator Service: To contact the center, call advisor will contact the appropriate help. 1-888-4-ONSTAR. You will be required to provide your security information. An advisor will send a command to your vehicle to sound the horn and/or flash the lamps.

2-92 D Route Support: An advisor can provide directions D subject to limitations caused by atmospheric or guidance to most places you want to go. In conditions, such as severe weather or topographical addition, they can help you locate gas stations, rest conditions, such as mountainous terrain; areas, ATMs, hospitals, hotels, stores, eateries D subject to cellular carrier equipment limitations. and more. D Global positioning locating capabilities will not be Ride Assist: An advisor can locate transportation in available if satellite signals are obstructed. the event that you are unable to drive. D OnStar will not function if the vehicle’s battery is Concierge Services: The concierge advisor can discharged or disconnected. It may also be inoperative if obtain tickets, reservations, or help with vacation/trip the vehicle is in an accident and the OnStar or vehicle planning and other unique items and services. electrical system components are damaged. OnStar System Limitations OnStar is the communication link between you and Complete limitations can be found on the Subscriber existing governmental emergency and roadside service Services Agreement. providers. OnStar will receive your call and use reasonable effort to contact an appropriate provider. In order to provide you with excellent service, calls with OnStar cannot promise that the providers will respond in the OnStar Center may be monitored or recorded. a timely manner or at all. OnStar service is: D Available in the 48 contiguous United States, Alaska, Hawaii and Canada; D available when the vehicle is within the operating range of a cellular provider;

2-93 R HomeLink Transmitter (Option) This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Changes and modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. Programming the HomeLink Transmitter Do not use the HomeLink Transmitter with any garage door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse” This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. safety feature. This includes any garage door opener Operation is subject to the following two conditions: model manufactured before April 1, 1982. (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage and (2) this device must accept any interference door you are programming. received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. It is recommended that a new battery be installed in your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more accurate transmission on the radio frequency.

2-94 Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while If you have trouble programming HomeLink, make programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to sure that you have followed the directions exactly as program up to three channels: described and that the battery in the hand-held 1. Decide which one of the three channels (one of the transmitter is not weak. If you still cannot program it, HomeLink buttons) you want to program. move the hand-held transmitter to the left or right or forward or backward or flip it upside down. HomeLink 2. Press and hold the desired button on HomeLink may not work with older garage door openers that do through Step 3. not meet current Federal Consumer Safety Standards. 3. When the HomeLink indicator light begins to blink If you cannot program the transmitter after repeated slowly (this may take up to 30 seconds), hold the attempts, refer to “Training a Garage Door Opener with hand-held transmitter about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) a “Rolling Code” Feature” later in this section or contact away from HomeLink and then press and hold the the manufacturer of HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515, or transmit button on the hand-held transmitter. on the internet at www.homelink.com. Continue to hold both buttons until the indicator Be sure to keep the original hand-held transmitter light on HomeLink begins to flash rapidly (this may in case you need to erase and reprogram the take up to 90 seconds). HomeLink Transmitter.

2-95 Training a Garage Door Opener with a 2. Press the Learn or Smart button on the garage “Rolling Code” Feature (If Equipped) door opener motor head unit. An indicator light will begin to flash when the motor head unit enters the If you have not previously programmed the hand-held training mode. transmitter to HomeLink, see “Programming the HomeLink Transmitter” listed previously. If you have Following this step, you have 30 seconds to completed this programming already, you now need to start Step 3. train the garage door opener motor head unit to 3. Return to HomeLink in your vehicle and firmly recognize HomeLink. press and release the programmed HomeLink button 1. Find the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage three times. door opener motor head unit. The exact location and The rolling-code garage door opener should now color of the button will vary by garage door opener recognize HomeLink. You may either use HomeLink or brand. If you have difficulty finding the Learn or the hand-held transmitter to open the garage door. Smart button, refer to your garage door opener owner’s manual or contact the manufacturer of If after following these instructions, you still have HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515, or on the internet problems training the garage door opener, contact the at www.homelink.com. manufacturer of HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com. Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another person available to assist you in programming the transmitter.

2-96 Canadian Programming Erasing Channels Canadian Owners: During programming, the To erase all three programmed channels, hold down the hand-held transmitter may automatically stop two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to transmitting after two seconds. In this case, you should flash (approximately 20 seconds). Release both buttons. press and hold the HomeLink button (see Steps 2 and 3 under “Programming the HomeLink Transmitter”) Resetting Defaults while you press and re-press (cycle) your hand-held To reset HomeLink to default settings, hold down the transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to is trained. flash (approximately 20 seconds). Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink indicator light turns off and Operating the HomeLink Transmitter then release both buttons. Press and hold the appropriate button on HomeLink for at least half of a second. The indicator light will come Accessories on while the signal is being transmitted. Accessories for the HomeLink Transmitter are available from the manufacturer of the unit. If you would like additional information, please contact the manufacturer of HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.

2-97 The Instrument Panel -- Your Information System

2-98 The main components of the instrument panel are the following:

A. Side Vents L. Ignition Switch B. Front Vents M. Climate Controls C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever N. Rear Fan Controls (Option) D. Hazard Warning Flasher Switch O. Cupholder Tray E. Instrument Panel Cluster P. Accessory Power Outlet F. Center Vents Q. Storage Bin G. Audio System R. Instrument Panel Switchbank H. Side Vents S. Glove Box I. Exterior Lamps Control T. Front Vents J. Hood Release U. Instrument Panel Fuse Block K. Horn

2-99 Instrument Panel Cluster Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re going, how much fuel you’re using, and many other things you’ll need to drive safely and economically. The indicator warning lights and gages are explained on the following pages.

United States version shown, Canada similar 2-100 Speedometer and Tamper In addition to the standard odometer, the cluster can also Resistant Odometer display two separate trip odometers (designated by the letter A or B in the display window) as well as your Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles vehicle’s Engine Oil Life (designated by the word OIL per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your in the display window). The display can be toggled odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven, between the odometer, the trip odometers and engine in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers oil life by quickly pressing and releasing the trip/reset (used in Canada). button located to the right of the temperature gage. Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer. The display toggles once each time the trip/reset button is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds. The display toggles You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a in the following sequence: Odometer - Trip new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the Odometer A - Trip Odometer B - Engine Oil Life. mileage total of the old odometer, then that will be done. If the engine oil life is left on the display, it will If it can’t, then it’s set at zero and a label must be put on automatically toggle back to the odometer after the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading when approximately 15 seconds. Each of the two trip the new odometer was installed. odometers can be used to keep track of different trip distances (for example, the mileage of a long trip Dual Trip Odometers and the mileage driven on the current tank of fuel). The trip odometers will continue to keep track of miles (kilometers) driven even if they are not currently displayed. To reset the odometer to zero (0), press and hold the trip/reset button for at least 1.5 seconds, but less than three seconds. Only the trip odometer that is showing in the display will be reset.

2-101 Retro-Active Reset Warning Lights, Gages, Messages Each of the two trip odometers has a feature called and Indicators retro-active reset. This feature can be used to set either (or both) trip odometer(s) to the number of miles This part describes the warning lights and gages that (kilometers) driven since the ignition was last turned on. may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you This can be used if you forget to reset your trip locate them. odometer at the beginning of a trip. To use the Warning lights and gages can signal that something is retro-active reset feature, press and hold the trip/reset wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an button for at least three seconds. The trip odometer will expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to then display the number of miles (kilometers) driven your warning lights and gages could also save you or since the ignition was last turned on and you began others from injury. driving. (If you use the retro-active reset feature after you have started the vehicle, but before you begin Warning lights come on when there may be or is a moving, the display will show the number of miles problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will see in the details on the next few pages, some (kilometers) you drove during the last ignition cycle.) Once you begin driving, the trip odometer will warning lights come on briefly when you start the accumulate mileage. For example, if you have driven engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are 5.0 miles (8.0 km) since you started your vehicle, and familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed then activate the retro-active reset feature, the display when this happens. will show 5.0 miles (8.0 km). As you drive, the display Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and (8.4 km), etc. Only the trip odometer that is displayed warning lights work together to let you know when will be affected by the retro-active reset so that both trip there’s a problem with your vehicle. odometers can be used separately.

2-102 When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on Safety Belt Reminder Light when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem, check the section that tells you When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice. come on for about eight seconds to remind people to Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even fasten their safety belts. dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights The safety belt light will and gages. They’re a big help. also come on and stay on Your vehicle also has a message center that works along for about 70 seconds. If the with the warning lights and gages. See “Message driver’s belt is already Center” in the Index. buckled, neither the chime nor the light will come on.

2-103 Air Bag Readiness Light There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument CAUTION: panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. If the air bag readiness light stays on after you The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The start your vehicle, it means the air bag system system check includes the air bag sensor, the air bag may not be working properly. The air bags in modules, the wiring and the diagnostic module. For your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they more information on the air bag system, see “Air Bag” in the Index. could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle This light will come on serviced right away if the air bag readiness light when you start your vehicle, stays on after you start your vehicle. and it will flash for a few seconds. Then the light should go out. This means The air bag readiness light should flash for a few the system is ready. seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away.

2-104 Brake System Warning Light This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s will come on when you set your parking brake. The light a problem. will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the means you have a brake problem. road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor. Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can vehicle towed for service. See “Anti-Lock Brake still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you System Warning Light” and “Towing Your Vehicle” in need both parts working well. the Index. If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake problem. Have your brake system inspected right away. CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident. If the light is still on after you’ve pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for service. United States Canada

2-105 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light Traction Control System Warning Light (Option) The anti-lock brake system warning light should come on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN.

If the anti-lock brake system warning light stays on United States Canada longer than normal after you’ve started your engine, turn the ignition off. Or, if the light comes on and stays on The traction control system warning light may come on when you’re driving, stop as soon as possible and turn for the following reasons: the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the D system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again If you turn the system off by pressing the TCS while you’re driving, the anti-lock brake system needs button located in the instrument panel switchbank service and you don’t have anti-lock brakes. the warning light will come on and stay on. To turn the system back on, press the button again. The The anti-lock brake system warning light should come warning light should go off. See “Traction Control on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the System” in the Index for more information. light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

2-106 D If there’s a brake system problem that is specifically Engine Coolant Temperature Gage related to traction control, the traction control system will turn off and the warning light will come on. If your brakes begin to overheat, the traction control system will turn off and the warning light will come on until your brakes cool down. D If the traction control system is affected by an engine-related problem, the system will turn off and the warning light will come on. If the traction control system warning light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on, your vehicle needs service. United States Canada

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the gage pointer moves into the red area, your engine is too hot! It means that your engine coolant has overheated. If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.

2-107 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Service This system is called OBD II (On-Board Engine Soon Light in the United States Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to assure or Check Engine Light in Canada) that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction. United States Canada NOTICE: Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission If you keep driving your vehicle with this light control systems. on, after a while, your emission controls may not work as well, your fuel economy may not be as good and your engine may not run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty.

2-108 D Light On Steady -- An emission control system NOTICE: malfunction has been detected on your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and Modifications made to the engine, transaxle, service may be required. exhaust, intake or fuel system of your vehicle or If the Light Is Flashing the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria The following may prevent more serious damage to (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission controls your vehicle: and may cause the SERVICE ENGINE SOON or D Reducing vehicle speed. CHECK ENGINE light to come on. D Avoiding hard accelerations. Modifications to these systems could lead to D costly repairs not covered by your warranty. This Avoiding steep uphill grades. may also result in a failure to pass a required D If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible. If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If This light should come on, as a check to show you it is the Light Is On Steady” following. working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired. stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle. This light will also come on during a malfunction in one Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the of two ways: engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light D Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing, detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your may damage the emission control system on your dealer or qualified service center for service. vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required.

2-109 If the Light Is On Steady Have you recently changed brands of fuel? You may be able to correct the emission system If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See malfunction by considering the following: “Fuel” in the Index. Poor fuel quality will cause your Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle? engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on the cap. See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index. The acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.) left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel This will be detected by the system and cause the light cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A to turn on. few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off. If you experience one or more of these conditions, change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water? one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off. If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition If none of the above steps have made the light turn off, will usually be corrected when the electrical system have your dealer or qualified service center check the dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off. vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and Are you low on fuel? diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed. As your engine starts to run out of fuel, your engine may not run as efficiently as designed since small amounts of air are sucked into the fuel line causing a misfire. The system can detect this. Adding fuel should correct this condition. Make sure to install the fuel cap properly. See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index. It will take a few driving trips to turn the light off.

2-110 Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Fuel Gage Some state/provincial and local governments have or may begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration. Here are some things you need to know in order to help your vehicle pass an inspection: Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light is on or not working properly. Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical United States Canada emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be When the indicator nears empty, you still have a little considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if fuel left, but you should get more soon. you have recently replaced your battery or if your battery has run down. The diagnostic system is designed If your fuel is low, the warning message in the message to evaluate critical emission control systems during center will come on. See “Low Fuel Warning Message” normal driving. This may take several days of routine later in this section. driving. If you have done this and your vehicle still does Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system left when the ignition is on. readiness, see your dealer or qualified service center to prepare the vehicle for inspection.

2-111 Here are four things that some owners ask about. All Charging System Indicator Message these things are normal and do not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage. The charging system battery symbol will come D At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before the on in the message center gage reads full. when you turn on the D It takes a little more (or less) fuel to fill up than the ignition as a check to gage reads. For example, the gage reads half full, but show you it is working. it took more (or less) than half of the tank’s capacity to fill it. It will remain on as long as the engine is not running. It D The gage pointer may move while cornering, braking should go out once the engine is running. If it stays on, or speeding up. or comes on while you are driving, you may have a D The gage may not indicate empty when the ignition problem with the charging system. It could indicate that is turned off. you have problems with a generator drive belt, or another electrical problem. Have it checked right away. Message Center Driving while this indicator appears in the message The message center is located in the instrument center could drain your battery. panel cluster. It gives you important safety and If you must drive a short distance with the message on, maintenance facts. be certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner.

2-112 Service Traction System Warning The message may appear for the following reasons: Message (Option) D If there’s a brake system problem that is specifically related to traction control, the traction control system will turn off and the warning message will come on. D If your brakes begin to overheat, the traction control system will turn off and the warning message will come on until your brakes cool down. D If the traction control system is affected by an engine-related problem, the system will turn off and United States Canada the warning message will come on. If the traction control system warning message comes on If your vehicle has the traction control system and this and stays on for an extended period of time when the message is displayed when you’re driving, there may be system is turned on, your vehicle needs service. a problem with your traction control system. Your vehicle may need service. When this message is displayed, the traction control system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

2-113 Traction Active Message (Option) Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Message

United States Canada United States Canada

If your vehicle has the traction control system, the TRACTION ACTIVE message will appear when the This message will come on when your engine gets traction control system is limiting wheel spin. You may too hot. feel or hear the system working, but this is normal. If this message comes on, it means that your engine Slippery road conditions may exist if this message coolant has overheated. If you have been operating your appears, so adjust your driving accordingly. The vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should message will stay on for a few seconds after the traction pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the control system stops limiting wheel spin. engine as soon as possible. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.

2-114 Low Oil Pressure Message CAUTION:

Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If you do, your engine can become so hot that it catches fire. You or others could be burned. Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced. United States Canada

Your vehicle is equipped with a low oil pressure warning warning message. NOTICE: Your oil pressure message lets you know when you may have a problem with your engine oil pressure. Damage to your engine from neglected oil When the engine is running and this message appears problems can be costly and is not covered by on, the engine oil level may be too low. There may also your warranty. be another problem causing low oil pressure.

2-115 Low Engine Oil Level Message Change Engine Oil Message

United States Canada United States Canada

If this message comes on, it means your engine is low If the change engine oil message comes on and stays on on oil. after you have started the engine, have the oil changed. You need to check the oil level right away. Have your For additional information, see “Engine Oil, When to vehicle serviced immediately. Change” in the Index. After changing the engine oil the system must be reset. See “How to Reset the Change Engine Oil Message” in the Index.

2-116 Power Sliding Door Warning Message If you shift the transaxle out of PARK (P) while the power sliding door is open or in the process of closing, and the power sliding door is turned off, a buzzer will sound. This is a warning that the power sliding door is not completely closed.

CAUTION: United States Canada If you shift the transaxle out of PARK (P) and accelerate before the power sliding door latches This message will come on if the power sliding door is not completely closed and the ignition is turned to RUN closed, the door may reverse to the open position. or START. A child or others could fall out of the vehicle and be injured. Always make sure the power sliding door is closed and latched before you drive away.

2-117 Door Ajar Warning Message Rear Hatch Ajar Warning Message

United States Canada United States Canada

This message will come on when the ignition is turned This message will come on when the ignition is turned to RUN or START and the driver’s or passenger’s door to RUN or START and the rear hatch is open. is open. It may also come on if a sliding door is not in the fully latched position.

2-118 PASS-KeyR III Security Message Low Fuel Warning Message

United States Canada United States Canada

If you are ever driving and this message comes on and If your fuel is low, the warning message will come on stays on, you will be able to restart your engine if you and stay on until you add fuel. turn it off. If the warning message is still on after adding fuel, you Your PASS-Key III system, however, is not working need to reset the warning message. To reset the warning properly and must be serviced by your dealer. Your message, turn the ignition off then back on. If the vehicle is not protected by the PASS-Key III system message stays on, see your dealer right away. at this time. See “PASS-Key III” in the Index for more information.

2-119 AWD Disable Warning Message Driver Information Center (If Equipped) (DIC) (Option)

United States Canada

You will receive this message when there is a spare tire on the vehicle or when the anti-lock brake system warning light comes on. The all-wheel-drive system will be disabled until the compact spare tire is replaced by a full-size tire. If the warning message is still on after putting on the full-size The DIC will show information about the vehicle and tire, you need to reset the warning message. To reset the surroundings. the warning message, turn the ignition off and then back on again. If the message stays on, see you dealer right D E/M (English/Metric Button): You can change the away. See “All-Wheel Drive” in the Index for display to a metric or English reading at any time by more information. pressing E/M.

2-120 D MODE: Press this button to cycle through three Setting the Variance modes of operation -- Off, Compass/Temperature and Trip Computer mode. In the Trip Computer mode, pressing the MODE button cycles through the five displays. Press the MODE button after the last Trip Computer display to return the DIC to the OFF mode. Off: No driver information is displayed in this mode of operation. Compass/Temperature Mode: One of eight compass readings and the outside temperature are displayed. If the temperature is below 38_F (3_C), the temperature reading will toggle between displaying the outside temperature and the word “ICE” for two minutes. Compass Variance Compass variance is the difference between magnetic Turn the ignition on and cycle the DIC to the north and geographic north. In some areas of the Compass/Temperature mode. Press both the E/M and country, the difference is great enough to cause the MODE buttons simultaneously for approximately compass to give false readings. If this occurs, the five seconds. The last entered variance zone number will compass variance must be set. be displayed. Press the E/M button until the proper variance number, as shown on the map, is showing. Press the MODE button to set the new variance zone and resume normal operation. The display will show all the display segments briefly to acknowledge the change in the zone number. 2-121 Automatic Compass Calibration Error Displays The compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the D An error of the vehicle’s speed sensor or fuel sender need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is will cause -E- to be displayed. new, the calibration process may not be complete. In D In the absence of vehicle communications, a these cases the calibration symbol C will be displayed dash “--” is displayed. where the compass reading is normally displayed. If one of these error messages appear, see your dealer. To calibrate the compass, in an area free from large metal objects, make three 360_ turns. The calibration Trip Computer symbol will turn off and the compass reading will be displayed. There are five trip computer displays which may be stepped through by pressing the MODE button. The Manual Compass Calibration information will appear in the following order: If the compass appears erratic and the calibration D AVG ECON (Average Fuel Economy): This shows symbol does not appear, you must manually put the the average fuel economy since the last reset. compass into the calibration mode. D INST ECON (Instantaneous Fuel Economy): This Turn the ignition on and cycle the DIC to the shows fuel economy for the most recent second Compass/Temperature mode. Press both the E/M and of driving. MODE buttons simultaneously for at least 10 seconds D RANGE (Trip Range): This shows the estimated until the calibration symbol appears. Release both _ distance that can be traveled with the remaining fuel. buttons and complete three 360 turns in an area free The fuel economy used to calculate range is based on from large metal objects. The calibration symbol will the last few hours of driving. turn off and the compass reading will be displayed. D FUEL USED (Trip Fuel Used): This shows the accumulated fuel used since the last reset. D AVG SPEED (Average Speed): This shows the average speed since the last reset. 2-122 Resetting the Trip Computer The rear PARK AID switch is located in the overhead Press and hold the MODE and E/M buttons for at least console switchbank. two seconds. The reset is acknowledged with the display showing all segments on briefly. A reset can only be done in AVG ECON, FUEL USED and AVG SPEED displays. AVG ECON, FUEL USED and AVG SPEED can be reset independently. Only the mode that is displayed will be reset. Rear Parking Assist (Option) Rear parking assist can help you to determine how close an object is to your rear bumper within a given area, making parking easier. It is not intended to be used Rear parking assist can be disabled by pressing the primarily as a rear obstacle detection system. part of the switch with the PARK AID disable symbol The rear parking assist display is located inside the on it. Pressing the textured part of the switch enables vehicle, above the rear window. It has three color-coded the system. lights that can be seen through the rearview mirror.

2-123 How the System Works If the rear parking assist system is not functioning If the rear park aid disable switch is not on, the rear properly, the display will flash red, indicating that there is parking assist turns on automatically when the shift a problem, unless the disable switch is on. The light will lever is moved into REVERSE (R) and the vehicle also flash red when the vehicle is shifting into speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h). When the system REVERSE (R), if a trailer was attached to your vehicle, turns on, the three lights on the display will illuminate or if a bicycle or an object was on the back of, or hanging for 1.5 seconds to let you know that the system is out of your liftgate during your last drive cycle. The light working. Rear parking assist senses how close your will continue to flash whenever in REVERSE (R) until vehicle is to an object. The distance is determined by the your vehicle is driven forward at least 15 mph (25 km/h) four ultrasonic sensors located on the rear bumper. without any obstructions behind the vehicle. When shifting into REVERSE (R) and an object is It will also flash red if the ultrasonic sensors are not kept detected, one of the following will occur: clean. So be sure to keep your rear bumper free of mud, D Amber/amber/red lights flashing and dirt, snow, ice and slush or the system may not work continuous chime...... 1 ft. (0.3 m) properly. If after cleaning the rear bumper and driving D Amber/amber/red lights and forward at least 15 mph (25 km/h), the display continues continuous chime...... 20 in. (0.5 m) to flash red, see your dealer. D Amber/amber lights...... 40 in. (1.0 m) It may also flash red if your vehicle is moving in D Amber light...... 5 ft. (1.5 m) REVERSE (R) at a speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h). Other conditions that may affect system performance A chime will sound the first time an object is detected, include things like the vibrations from a jackhammer or if the object is between 20 inches (0.5 cm) and the compression of air brakes on a very large truck. 5 feet (1.5 m) away. As always, drivers should use care when backing up a Rear parking assist can detect objects 3 inches (7.6 cm) vehicle. Always look behind you, being sure to check and wider, and at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) tall, but it for other vehicles, obstructions and blind spots. cannot detect objects that are above liftgate level. In For cleaning instructions, see “Cleaning Your Vehicle” order for the rear sensors to recognize an object, it must in the Index. be within operating range. 2-124 Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems

In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.

3-2 Comfort Controls 3-34 AM-FM Stereo with Six-Disc Compact Disc 3-3 Air Conditioning Player with Programmable Equalization and 3-4 Heating Radio Data System (RDS) (If Equipped) 3-4 Defogging and Defrosting 3-44 Entertainment System (Option) 3-5 Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped) 3-52 Rear Seat Audio (Vehicles without the 3-6 Rear Climate Control (Vehicles without the Entertainment System) (If Equipped) Entertainment System) (Option) 3-54 Rear Seat Audio (Vehicles with the 3-8 Rear Climate Control (Vehicles with the Entertainment System) (Option) Entertainment System) (Option) 3-56 Theft-Deterrent Feature Non-RDS Radios 3-10 Ventilation System 3-56 Theft-Deterrent Feature RDS Radios 3-11 Audio Systems 3-56 Understanding Radio Reception 3-11 Setting the Clock for Systems without Radio 3-56 Understanding DVD Distortion Data System 3-57 Tips About Your Audio System 3-12 Setting the Clock for Systems with Radio Data 3-58 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player System (RDS) 3-59 Care of Your Compact Discs and DVDs 3-12 AM-FM Stereo 3-59 Care of Your Compact Disc and DVD Player 3-15 AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player 3-59 Cleaning Your DVD Player with Radio Data System (RDS) and Automatic 3-59 Cleaning the Video Screen Tone Control (If Equipped) 3-59 Fixed Mast Antenna 3-23 AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and Compact Disc Player with Radio Data System (RDS) and Automatic Tone Control3- (If Equipped) 3-1 Comfort Controls Temperature Knob This section tells you how to make your air system work The center knob controls the temperature of the air for you. coming through the system. Turn it clockwise toward the red area for warmer air. Turn it counterclockwise With this system, you can control the heating, cooling toward the blue area for cooler air. and ventilation in your vehicle. Your vehicle also has a flow-through ventilation system described later in Mode Knob this section. The right knob is used to select the direction of the air flowing into the vehicle. (Vent): This setting directs air through the instrument panel outlets. (Bi-Level): This setting directs air into your vehicle in two ways. Cooler air is directed toward your upper body through the instrument panel outlets, while warmer air is directed through the floor ducts. (Floor): This setting brings in most of the air through the floor ducts. This setting is also used to send air to the rear of the vehicle. Keep the area under the Fan Knob front seats free of objects that could obstruct airflow to the rear of the vehicle. The left knob is the fan knob and is used to select the force of air you want. Turn the knob clockwise to increase fan speed and counterclockwise to decrease fan speed. The fan must be turned on for the air conditioning compressor to operate. 3-2 cold and damp. To clear the fog, switch the HVAC (Defog): This setting directs air to the windshield system to either the defog or defrost mode and increase and through the floor ducts. This mode is useful during the fan speed. To avoid re-fogging of the windows, cold or inclement weather because of your vehicle’s operate the HVAC system in the outside air mode. larger windshield area. A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn (Defrost): This setting directs most of the air to the the air conditioning compressor on and off. The light in windshield and side window vents. the button will glow when the air conditioning is in use. Mode Buttons Air Conditioning (Outside Air): Press this button to send outside On very hot days, your vehicle will cool down more air into your vehicle. The light in the button will glow quickly and economically if you open the windows long when outside air is in use. Using this setting while trying enough to let hot, inside air escape. For all settings, to defrost or defog the windows will help clear the vents adjust the temperature control knob and fan speed of moisture. While floor, defog or defrost mode is as desired. selected, the system will automatically go to outside To get maximum cooling or a quick cool-down on air mode. very hot days, press the A/C and recirculation buttons (Recirculation): Press this button to limit the and turn the temperature knob counterclockwise toward amount of outside air entering your vehicle. The light in the blue area. Adjust the mode knob to direct the air to the button will glow when outside air is in use. You may the desired location. This setting should not be used for use this setting to limit odors entering your vehicle. long periods of time because the air may become too cold and dry. Push the A/C button again the to turn off Operating the Heating/Ventilation/Air Conditioning the air conditioning. (HVAC) system in the recirculation mode may cause fogging of the vehicle’s windows when the weather is

3-3 When the air conditioner compressor is on, you may Your vehicle has a computer controlled transaxle sometimes notice slight changes in your vehicle’s engine designed to warm up the engine faster when the outside performance and power. This is normal. The system is temperature is 35_F (2_C) or colder. You may notice designed to help fuel economy while it maintains the that the transaxle will shift at a higher vehicle speed desired cooling level. until the engine is warmed up. This is a normal The air conditioner removes moisture from the air, so condition designed to provide heat to the passenger you may sometimes notice water dripping from under compartment and defrost the windows more quickly. your vehicle’s engine compartment when it is idling or If you have the optional engine coolant heater and use it after it has been turned off. This is normal. during cold weather, 0_F (-18_C) or lower, your heating system will provide heat more quickly because the Heating engine coolant is already warmed. See “Engine Coolant Turn the temperature knob clockwise toward the red Heater” in the Index. area to warm the air. Defogging and Defrosting In the floor mode, outside air will be brought in and sent through the floor outlets. The heater works best if you To rapidly defrost the windshield, turn the temperature keep your windows closed while using it. control knob all the way clockwise to the red area and turn the mode knob to defrost. Adjust the fan to the The bi-level setting is designed for use on sunny days highest speed. when the air is only moderately warm or cool. On days like these, the sun may adequately warm your upper To keep the windshield clear and bring in heated air body, but your lower body may not be warm enough. through the floor ducts, turn the mode knob to defog. For the best results, turn the temperature control knob to When the temperature outside is above freezing, the air the middle position, and then adjust it for comfort. conditioner compressor will run in these settings to help remove moisture from the air.

3-4 Your vehicle is equipped with side window defogger Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped) vents located on the top of the instrument panel. For additional side window defogging, turn the mode knob Press the REAR button to the bi-level setting and adjust the fan to the highest to warm the defogger grid speed. Aim the side vents on the instrument panel on the rear window and toward the side windows. For increased airflow to the to turn on the heated side vents, close the center vents. outside rearview mirrors. Operating the HVAC system in the recirculation mode may cause fogging of the vehicle’s windows when the weather is cold and damp. To clear the fog, switch the HVAC system to either the defog or defrost mode and increase the fan speed. To avoid re-fogging of the windows, operate the HVAC system in the outside The system will turn off automatically after about air mode. 10 minutes of use. If you turn it on again, the defogger will operate for about five minutes. You can also turn For additional information, refer to “Recirculation” the defogger off by turning off the ignition or by earlier in this section. pressing the button again. Do not attach a temporary vehicle license across the defogger grid on the rear window.

NOTICE:

Don’t use a razor blade or something else sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

3-5 Rear Climate Control (Vehicles without the Rear Fan Control Entertainment System) (Option) This option comes with the rear climate controls. If you have the optional rear climate control, the rear Keep the area around the base of the center instrument seat passengers can control the temperature and the panel console and the area between and under the front amount of air directed to the rear of the vehicle. You can seats free of objects that would obstruct airflow to the also adjust the amount of air directed to the rear of the rear of the vehicle. vehicle using the front fan control knob. The rear fan control When it’s cold outside, set the main climate control is located below the mode knob to lower, defog or defrost to send air to the climate control system, rear of the vehicle through the floor ducts. in the switchbank. Set the main climate control mode knob to vent or bi-level to send air to the rear of the vehicle through the headliner outlets. To send conditioned air to the rear of the vehicle, press the A/C button on the main climate controls. If you do not select A/C, air directed to the rear of the vehicle will be cabin temperature. Turn the fan control to the desired setting for the amount of air to be directed to the rear of the vehicle. The temperature of the air will be the same as the air in the front of the vehicle. The rear fan control in the instrument panel switchbank has an R setting which allows the rear passengers to use the rear climate control knobs to adjust the air through the rear air outlets.

3-6 Rear Comfort Controls Rear Air Vents To maximize airflow through the rear floor outlet, place the left bucket seat in the second row in the forward position. See “Adjusting Rear Seats” in the Index.

The rear climate control knobs are located in the panel above the driver’s seat. Turn the temperature knob counterclockwise to the blue area for cooler air, or clockwise to the red area for warmer air. Turn the rear fan knob to adjust the force of air coming through the rear outlets. The vent behind the left rear seat is the cold air return Select the desired climate control mode using the vent. Be sure to keep it free of obstructions. directional controls on the instrument panel. See “Mode Keep the area around the base of the center instrument Knob” earlier in this section. The mode you choose will panel console, between and under the front seats, free of regulate both the front and rear climate control systems. objects that could obstruct airflow to the rear.

3-7 Rear Climate Control (Vehicles with the To send conditioned air to the rear of the vehicle, press Entertainment System) (Option) the A/C button on the main climate controls. If you do not select air conditioning, air directed to the rear of the vehicle will be cabin temperature. The rear fan control in the instrument panel switchbank has an R setting which allows the rear passengers to use the rear climate controls to adjust the air through the rear air outlets. If it is not in the R setting, the overhead entertainment console display will show DISABLED when the FAN or TEMP button is pressed.

If you have the optional rear entertainment system, the Rear Fan Control rear seat passengers can control the temperature and the Keep the area around the base of the center instrument amount of air directed to the rear of the vehicle. You can panel console and the area between and under the front also adjust the amount of air directed to the rear of the seats free of objects that would obstruct airflow to the vehicle using the front fan knob. rear of the vehicle. When it’s cold outside, set the main climate control Press the FAN button in the overhead entertainment mode knob to floor, defog or defrost to send air to the console to adjust the fan speed. The display will show rear of the vehicle through the floor ducts. the current setting. Press the left and right arrow buttons Set the main climate control mode knob to vent or to cycle through the available settings: OFF, LOW, bi-level to send air to the rear of the vehicle through the MED and HIGH. headliner outlets.

3-8 Rear Temperature Control Press the TEMP button in the overhead entertainment console to adjust the temperature of the air to the rear seat. Press the left arrow button to make air cooler. Press the right arrow button to make the air warmer. Rear Air Vents To maximize airflow through the rear floor outlet, place the left bucket seat in the second row in the forward position. See “Adjusting Rear Seats” in the Index.

The vent behind the left rear seat is the cold air return vent. Be sure to keep it free of obstructions. Keep the area around the base of the center instrument panel console, between and under the front seats, free of objects that could obstruct airflow to the rear.

3-9 Ventilation System Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies outside air into the vehicle when it is moving. Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the fan is running. Your vehicle has air outlets that allow you to adjust the direction and amount of airflow inside the vehicle. Push the outlet up or down to change the direction of the airflow. Increase or reduce the amount of airflow by opening and closing the louvers. Opening and closing the louvers will also direct airflow from side to side. The air-flow through the vents can be shut off completely by turning the thumbwheel next to each outlet all the way down. You can also stop outside air from entering the vehicle by turning the fan to off and pressing the recirculation button.

3-10 Ventilation Tips Audio Systems D Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or Your audio system has been designed to operate easily any other obstruction (such as leaves). This will and give years of listening pleasure. You will get the allow the heater and defroster to work much better, most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it reducing the chance of fogging the inside of first. Find out what your audio system can do and how your windows. to operate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting the D When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it. fan knob to 5, the highest setting, for a few moments Your vehicle may have a feature called Retained before driving off. This helps clear the intake ducts Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, you can play your of snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of audio system even after the ignition is turned off. See fogging the inside of your windows. “Retained Accessory Power” in the Index. D Keep the area around the base of the center instrument panel console and the air path under the Setting the Clock for Systems without front seats clear of objects. This helps air to circulate Radio Data System throughout your vehicle. Press and hold the HR or MIN arrow for two seconds. D In cold weather, operating the system in the Then press the HR arrow until the correct hour appears. outside air mode will improve the time it takes to Press and hold the MIN arrow until the correct minute warm the vehicle. appears. The clock may be set with the ignition on or off.

3-11 Setting the Clock for Systems with Radio AM-FM Stereo Data System (RDS) Your radio may have a button marked with an H or HR to represent hours and an M or MN to represent minutes. Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour appears. AM will appear on the display for morning hours. Press and hold the minute button until the correct minute appears. The clock may be set with the ignition on or off. To set the clock to the time of an FM station broadcasting Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time until TIME UPDATED appears on the display. If Playing the Radio the time is not available from the station, NO UPDATE will appear on the display instead. PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on and off. VOL (Volume): Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. RCL (Recall): Pressing this knob will display the station being played or it will display the clock. Clock display is available with the ignition turned off.

3-12 Finding a Station Setting Preset Stations AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to and FM2. The display shows your selection. your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations. (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the following steps: SEEK SEEK : Press the right or left arrow to 1. Turn the radio on. seek to the next or previous station and stay there. The radio will seek to stations with a strong signal only. 2. Press AM FM to select AM, FM1 or FM2. To scan stations, press and hold one of the SEEK arrows 3. Tune in the desired station. for two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go 4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons to a station, play for a few seconds and flash the station until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that frequency, then go on to the next station. Press one of numbered pushbutton, the station you set will return. the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning. The radio will scan to stations with a strong signal only. 5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. To scan preset stations, press and hold one of the SEEK Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) arrows for more than four seconds until you hear two beeps. The radio will go to the first preset station AUDIO: To adjust the bass, press and release the stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few seconds and AUDIO button repeatedly until BAS appears on the flash the station frequency, then go on to the next preset display. Then press and hold the up arrow to increase station. This feature will only scan the six presets that bass. B and a positive number will appear on the display. are in the selected band. Press one of the SEEK arrows Press and hold the down arrow to decrease bass. B and a again to stop scanning presets. The channel number negative number will appear on the display. B and a zero (P1 through P6) will appear momentarily before the will appear on the display when the bass level is frequency is displayed. The radio will scan preset adjusted to the middle position. Release the up or down stations with a strong signal only. arrow when you find the bass level you want or when the maximum or minimum level is reached.

3-13 To adjust the treble, press and release the AUDIO button Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) until TRE appears on the display. Then press and hold AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right and the up arrow to increase treble. T and a positive number left speakers, press and release the AUDIO button until will appear on the display. Press and hold the down BAL appears on the display. Then press and hold the arrow to decrease treble. T and a negative number will up arrow to move the sound to the right speakers or the appear on the display. T and a zero will appear on the down arrow to move the sound to the left speakers. display when the treble level is adjusted to the middle R and a number will appear on the display when the position. Release the up or down arrow when you find sound is balanced toward the right speakers. L and a the treble level you want or when the maximum or number will appear on the display when the sound is minimum level is reached. If a station is weak or noisy, balanced toward the left speakers. L and a zero will you may want to decrease the treble. appear on the display when the sound is balanced To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, select between the speakers. Release the up or down arrow BAS or TREB. Then press and hold the AUDIO button when you find the speaker balance you want or when for more than two seconds until you hear a beep. B and the maximum or minimum level is reached. a zero or T and a zero will appear on the display. To To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers, adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls to press and release the AUDIO button until FAD appears the middle position, end out of audio mode by pressing on the display. Then press and hold the up arrow to another button, which the radio will perform that move the sound to the front speakers or the down arrow function, or by waiting 5 seconds which the radio will to move the sound to the rear speakers. F and a number go to the clock display. Then press and hold the AUDIO will appear on the display when the sound is balanced button for more than two seconds until you hear a beep. toward the front speakers. R and a number will appear CEN will appear on the display. on the display when the sound is balanced toward the rear speakers. F and a zero will appear on the display when the sound is balanced between the speakers. Release the up or down arrow when you find the speaker balance you want or when the maximum or minimum level is reached. 3-14 To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, select AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player BAL or FAD. Then press and hold AUDIO for more with Radio Data System (RDS) and than two seconds until you hear a beep. L and a zero or Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped) F and a zero will appear on the display. To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls to the middle position, end out of audio mode by pressing another button, which the radio will perform that function, or by waiting 5 seconds which the radio will go to the clock display. Then press and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear a beep. CEN will appear on the display. Radio Messages CAL (Calibration): Your audio system has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CAL appears on the display it means that your radio has not been configured properly for your vehicle and must be Playing the Radio returned to the dealership for service. PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on and off. A VOL " (Volume): Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.

3-15 AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic Finding a Station volume, your audio system adjusts automatically to BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 make up for road and wind noise as you drive. and FM2. The display shows your selection. Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to A TUNE ": Turn this knob to choose radio stations. select LOW, MEDIUM or HIGH. AVOL will appear on the display. The volume level should always sound the A SEEK ": Press the right or left arrow to seek to the same to you as you drive. Each higher volume setting next or previous station and stay there. The radio will allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle seek to stations with a strong signal only. The sound will speeds. Then as you drive, automatic volume increases mute while seeking. the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any speed. A PSCAN " (Preset Scan): Press and hold one of the NONE will appear on the display if the radio cannot arrows for more than two seconds and the radio will determine the vehicle speed. If you don’t want to use produce one beep. The radio will scan to the first preset automatic volume, select OFF. station stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few DISP (Display): Press this knob when the ignition is off seconds and flash the station frequency, then go on to to display the clock. the next preset station. Press one of the arrows or one of the pushbuttons again to stop scanning. SCAN will be displayed whenever the tuner is in the preset scan mode. The channel number (P1 through P6) will appear with the frequency. In FM mode, this function will scan through the current band such as FM1 or FM2. The radio will scan preset stations with a strong signal only. The sound will mute while scanning.

3-16 Setting Preset Stations Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations BASS or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease. following steps: The display will show the bass or treble level. If a 1. Turn the radio on. station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble. 2. Press BAND to select AM, FM1 or FM2. To adjust bass and treble to the middle position, push 3. Tune in the desired station. and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one 4. Press AUTO TONE to choose the bass and treble beep and adjust the display level to the middle position. equalization that best suits the type of station you are To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle listening to. position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone 5. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons. or speaker control is displayed. You will hear one beep The radio will produce one beep. Whenever you and the radio will display ALL. The bass and treble will press that numbered pushbutton, the station you set be adjusted to the middle position. will return and the bass and treble equalization that AUTO TONE: This feature allows you to choose you selected will also be automatically selected for preset bass and treble equalization settings designed that pushbutton. for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock and 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. classical stations. Each time you press the AUTO TONE button, this feature will switch to one of these program types. To return the bass and treble to the manual mode, push and release the AUDIO knob until the display goes blank.

3-17 Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) Using RDS AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right and Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data left speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until System (RDS). RDS is a system that receives data along BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob clockwise to with the audio of the FM station you are currently tuned move the sound to the right speakers and to. You can use RDS to display program information counterclockwise to move the sound to the left speakers. and to control your radio. With RDS your radio can do To adjust the fade, push and release the AUDIO knob the following: until FADE appears on the display. Turn the knob D Seek only to stations with the types of programs you clockwise to move the sound to the front speakers want to listen to, and counterclockwise to move the sound to the D seek to stations with traffic announcements, rear speakers. D receive announcements concerning local and To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position, national emergencies, and push the AUDIO knob, then push it again and hold it until you hear one beep. The balance and fade will be D receive and display messages from radio stations. adjusted to the middle position and the display will RDS features are only available on FM stations which show the speaker balance. broadcast RDS information. The RDS features of your To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle radio rely on receiving specific RDS information from position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone these stations. These features will only work when the or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce RDS information is available. In rare cases, a radio one beep and display ALL with the level display in the station may broadcast incorrect information that will middle position. cause the radio features to work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.

3-18 When you are tuned to an RDS station, the station name Finding a PTY Preset Station will appear on the display, instead of the frequency. P-TYPE LIST (Program Type): Turn this knob Most RDS stations provide their station name, the time clockwise or counterclockwise to select the Program of day and a Program Type (PTY) for their current Type (PTY) you want to listen to. TYPE and a PTY will programming. Some stations also provide the name of appear on the display. Press the SEEK TYPE button and the current program. the radio will seek to the first RDS broadcaster of the Finding RDS Stations selected program type. If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE will appear on the display To find RDS stations, perform the following steps: and the radio will return to the last station you were 1. Press the SEEK TYPE button or turn the P-TYPE listening to. LIST knob to display the program type list. BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency 2. Turn the knob either clockwise or counterclockwise allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the to select a program type. The list is alphabetical. If same program type. Press and hold BAND for two you select ANY TYPE your radio will seek to the seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON will first PTY available. appear on the display. The radio may switch to stronger stations. Press and hold BAND again for two seconds to 3. Press the SEEK TYPE button to activate search. turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF will appear on the DISP (Display): Press this knob to change what appears display. The radio will not switch to other stations. When on the display while using RDS. Pressing this knob will you turn the ignition off and then on again, the alternate also display an RDS station frequency or program type frequency feature will automatically be turned on. when the radio is on. The display options are station SEEK TYPE: Press this button to go to a station with name, station frequency, PTY and the name of the the last selected PTY; TYPE and the last selected PTY program (if available). Pressing and holding this knob will appear on the display, if it is not already showing. will activate the RDS default display. Press TYPE a second time to seek. If a station with the selected PTY is not found, the radio will return to the original station and display NONE. 3-19 RDS Messages the display until another new message is received. The ALERT!: Alert warns of national or local emergencies. old message can be displayed by pressing the INFO You will not be able to turn off alert announcements. button until a new message is received or a different ALERT! appears on the display when an alert station is tuned to. When a message is not available announcement plays. When an alert announcement from an FM station, NO INFO will be displayed. comes on the current radio station, you will hear it, TRAF (Traffic): Press this button to receive traffic even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is announcements. If the current station does not broadcast playing. If the compact disc player is playing, play will traffic announcements, the radio will seek to a station stop for the announcement and resume when the that does. The traffic symbol will flash on the display. announcement is finished. When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic This function will only work during actual emergency announcements, it will stop. If no station is found, NO broadcasts, and will not work during tests of the TRAF will appear on the display. emergency broadcast system. This feature is not Your radio can be programmed to interrupt the playback supported by all RDS stations. of a CD or FM station by enabling the traffic interrupt INFO (Information): If the current station has a feature. Press the TRAF button once to seek to an RDS message, the information symbol will appear on the station that supports the traffic interrupt feature if the display. These text messages are from the RDS current station does not. The traffic symbol will flash on broadcaster to the listening public and may be general the display when seeking for a station that supports information such as artist and song title, call in phone traffic interrupt. When the traffic interrupt feature is on, numbers, etc. Press this button to see the message. If the TRAF will appear on the display. whole message does not appear on the display, parts of When a traffic announcement comes on the current radio the message will appear every three seconds until the station, you will hear it, even if the volume is muted or a message is completed. To scroll through the message at compact disc is playing. The traffic symbol and your own speed, press the INFO button again for less TRAFFIC will appear on the display while the traffic than one second. A new group of words will appear on announcement plays. If the compact disc player was the display. Once the complete message has been being used, the compact disc will stay in the player and displayed, the information symbol will disappear from resume play at the point where it stopped. 3-20 Radio Messages 1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the CAL ERR (Calibration Error): This message is previous track if the current track has been playing for displayed when the radio has not been calibrated less than eight seconds. If this pushbutton is pressed properly for the vehicle. You must return to the and the current track has been playing for more than dealership for service. eight seconds, it will go to the beginning of the current track. TRACK and the track number will appear on the LOCKED: This message is displayed when the display. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than R THEFTLOCK system has locked up. You must once, the player will continue moving back through the return to the dealership for service. disc. The sound will mute while seeking. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be 2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track. corrected, contact your dealer. TRACK and the track number will appear on the display. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than Playing a Compact Disc once, the player will continue moving forward through Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The the disc. The sound will mute while seeking. player will pull it in and the disc should begin playing. 3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to The display will show the CD symbol. If you want to reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this insert a compact disc with the ignition off, first press pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at DISP or EJT. six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the normal Messages” later in this section. playing speed. Release it to play the track. The display will show ET and the elapsed time.

3-21 4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to DISP (Display): Press this knob to see how long the advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed time pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at will appear on the display. To change what is normally six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it shown on the display (track or elapsed time), press the for more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the knob until you see the display you want, then hold the normal playing speed. Release it to play the track. knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep. The display will show ET and the elapsed time. BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio 6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the when a CD is playing. The CD will stop but remain tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM in the player. ON will appear on the display. RDM T and the track CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD number will appear on the display when each track starts when listening to the radio. The inactive CD will remain to play. Press RDM again to turn off random play. safely inside the radio for future listening. RDM OFF will appear on the display. EJT (Eject): Press this button to stop a CD when it A SEEK ": Press the left arrow to go to the start of the is playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Eject current or previous track. Press the right arrow to go to may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. the start of the next track. If either of the arrows is held CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this or pressed more then once, the player will continue button is pressed first. moving backward or forward through the CD.

3-22 Compact Disc Messages AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and If the disc comes out, it could be for one of the Compact Disc Player with Radio Data following reasons: System (RDS) and Automatic Tone Control D If you’re driving on a very rough road. When the (If Equipped) road becomes smooth the disc should play. D If it’s very hot. When the temperature returns to normal, the disc should play. D The disc is upside down. D It is dirty, scratched or wet. D The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and try again.) D If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason, try a known good CD. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be corrected, contact your dealer. Playing the Radio PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on and off. A VOL " (Volume): Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.

3-23 AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic Finding a Station volume, your audio system adjusts automatically to BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 make up for road and wind noise as you drive. and FM2. The display will show your selection. Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to A TUNE ": Turn this knob to choose radio stations. select LOW, MEDIUM or HIGH. AVOL will appear on the display. The volume level should always sound the A SEEK ": Press the right or left arrow to seek to the same to you as you drive. Each higher volume setting next or previous station and stay there. The radio will allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle seek to stations with a strong signal only. The sound will speeds. Then as you drive, automatic volume increases mute while seeking. the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any speed. A PSCAN " (Preset Scan): Press and hold one NONE will appear on the display if the radio cannot of the arrows for more than two seconds. The radio will determine the vehicle speed. If you don’t want to use produce one beep. The radio will scan through each of automatic volume, select OFF. the preset stations stored on your pushbuttons, play for DISP (Display): Pressing this knob will display the a few seconds, then go on to the next preset station. clock. Clock display is available with the ignition turned Press one of the arrows or one of the pushbuttons again on or off. Press this knob to display an RDS station to stop scanning. SCAN will be displayed whenever the frequency or program type when the radio is on. tuner is in the preset scan mode. The channel number (P1 through P6) will appear with the frequency. In FM mode, this function will scan through the current band such as FM1 or FM2. The radio will scan preset stations with a strong signal only. The sound will mute while scanning.

3-24 Setting Preset Stations Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations BASS or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease. following steps: The display will show the bass or treble level. If a 1. Turn the radio on. station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble. 2. Press BAND to select AM, FM1 or FM2. To adjust bass and treble to the middle position, push 3. Tune in the desired station. and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one 4. Press AUTO TONE to choose the bass and treble beep and adjust the display level to the middle position. equalization that best suits the type of station you are To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle listening to. position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone 5. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons. or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce The radio will produce one beep. Whenever you one beep and display ALL with the level display in the press that numbered pushbutton, the station you set middle position. will return and the bass and treble equalization that AUTO TONE (Automatic): This feature allows you selected will also be automatically selected for you to choose bass and treble equalization settings that pushbutton. designed for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock and 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. classical stations. Each time you press the AUTO TONE button, this feature will change to one of the preset equalization settings previously listed. To return the bass and treble to the manual mode, push and release the AUDIO knob until MANUAL is displayed. 3-25 Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) Using RDS AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right and Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data System left speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until (RDS). RDS is a system that receives data along with the BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob clockwise audio of the FM station you are currently tuned to. You can to move the sound to the right speakers and use RDS to display program information and to control your counterclockwise to move the sound to the left speakers. radio. With RDS, the radio can do the following: D To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers, Seek only to stations with the types of programs you push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears want to listen to, on the display. Turn the knob clockwise to move the D seek to stations with traffic announcements, sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise to D receive announcements concerning local and move the sound to the rear speakers. national emergencies, and The middle position balances the sound between the D receive and display messages from radio stations. speakers. To adjust the balance and fade to the middle RDS features are only available on FM stations that position, push the AUDIO knob then push it again and broadcast RDS information. The RDS features of your hold it until you hear one beep. The balance and fade radio rely on receiving specific RDS information from will be adjusted to the middle position and the display these stations. These features will only work when the will show the speaker balance. RDS information is available. In rare cases, a radio To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle station may broadcast incorrect information that will position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone cause the radio features to work improperly. If this or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce happens, contact the radio station. one beep and display ALL with the level display in the When you are tuned to an RDS station, the station name middle position. will appear on the display, instead of the frequency. Most RDS stations provide their station name, the time of day and a Program Type (PTY) for their current programming. Some stations also provide the name of the current program. 3-26 Finding RDS Stations Finding a PTY Station To find RDS stations perform the following steps: P-TYPE LIST (Program Type): Turn this knob 1. Push the SEEK TYPE button or turn the P-TYPE clockwise or counterclockwise to select the Program LIST knob to display the program type list. Type (PTY) you want to listen to. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the display. Press the SEEK TYPE button and 2. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob either clockwise or the radio will seek to the first RDS broadcaster of the counterclockwise to select a program type. The list is selected program type. If the radio cannot find the alphabetical. If you select ANY TYPE your radio desired program type, NONE will appear on the display will seek to the first PTY available. and the radio will return to the last station you were 3. Push the SEEK TYPE button to activate search. listening to. A VOL " (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise to BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency increase volume when RDS interrupts regular play. Turn allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the it counterclockwise to decrease volume. same program type. Press and hold BAND for two seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON will DISP (Display): Press this knob to change what appears appear on the display. The radio may switch to stronger on the display while using RDS. Pressing this knob will stations. Press and hold BAND again for two seconds to also display an RDS station frequency or program type turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF will appear on the when the radio is on. The display options are station display. The radio will not switch to other stations. When name, station frequency, PTY and the name of the you turn the ignition off and then on again, the alternate program (if available). Pressing and holding this knob frequency feature will automatically be turned on. will activate the RDS default display. SEEK TYPE: Press this button to go to a station with the last selected PTY; TYPE and the last selected PTY will appear on the display, if it is not already showing. Press SEEK TYPE a second time to seek. If a station with the selected PTY is not found, the radio will return to the original station and display NONE. 3-27 RDS Messages again for less than one second. A new group of words will appear on the display. Once the complete message ALERT!: Alert warns of national or local emergencies. has been displayed, the information symbol will You will not be able to turn off alert announcements. disappear from the display until another new message ALERT! appears on the display when an alert announcement plays. When an alert announcement is received. The old message can be displayed by pressing the INFO button until a new message is comes on the current radio station, you will hear it, even received or a different station is tuned to. When a if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or compact disc message is not available from an FM station, NO INFO is playing. If the cassette tape or compact disc player is will be displayed. playing, play will stop for the announcement and resume when the announcement is finished. TRAF (Traffic): Press this button to receive traffic announcements. If the current station does not broadcast This function will only work during actual emergency traffic announcements, the radio will seek to a station broadcasts, and will not work during tests of the that does. The traffic symbol will flash on the display. emergency broadcast system. This feature is not When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic supported by all RDS stations. announcements, it will stop. If no station is found, NO INFO (Information): If the current station has a TRAF will appear on the display. message, the information symbol will appear on the Your radio can be programmed to interrupt the playback display. These text messages are from the RDS of a cassette tape, CD or FM radio by enabling the broadcaster to the listening public and may be general traffic interrupt feature. Press the TRAF button once to information such as artist and song title, call in phone numbers, etc. Press this button to see the message. seek to an RDS station that supports the traffic interrupt feature if the current station does not. The traffic symbol If the whole message does not appear on the display, will flash on the display when seeking for a station that parts of the message will appear every three seconds supports traffic interrupt. When the traffic interrupt until the message is completed. To scroll through the feature is on, TRAF will appear on the display. message at your own speed, press the INFO button

3-28 When a traffic announcement comes on the current radio Playing a Cassette Tape station, you will hear it, even if the volume is muted or a Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are cassette tape or compact disc is playing. The traffic up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer symbol and TRAFFIC will appear on the display while than that are so thin they may not work well in this the traffic announcement plays. If the cassette tape or player. The longer side with the tape visible should face compact disc player was being used, the tape or compact to the right. If the ignition is on, but the radio is off, the disc will stay in the player and resume play at the point tape can be inserted and will begin playing. A tape where it stopped. symbol is shown on the display whenever a tape is Radio Messages inserted. If you hear nothing but a garbled sound, the tape may not be in squarely. Press EJT to remove the CAL ERR (Calibration Error): This message is tape and start over. displayed when the radio has not been calibrated properly for the vehicle. You must return to the While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIO and dealership for service. SEEK controls just as you do for the radio. The display will show TAPE and an arrow showing which side of LOCKED: This message is displayed when the the tape is playing. THEFTLOCKR system has locked up. You must return to the dealership for service. If you want to insert a tape when the ignition is off, first press EJT or DISP. If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape Messages” later in this section.

3-29 1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the 3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse the previous selection on the tape if the selection has been tape rapidly. Press it again to return to playing speed. playing for less than three seconds. If this pushbutton is The radio will play the last selected station while the pressed and the current selection has been playing for tape reverses. The station frequency and REV will more than 13 seconds, it will go to the beginning of the appear on the display. You may select stations during current selection. If this pushbutton is pressed and the reverse operation by using TUNE, SEEK or PSCAN. current selection has been playing from 3 to 13 seconds, 4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to advance it will go to the beginning of the previous selection or quickly to another part of the tape. Press this pushbutton the beginning of the current selection, depending upon again to return to playing speed. The radio will play the the position on the tape. SEEK and a -1 will appear on last selected station while the tape advances. The station the display while the cassette player is in the previous frequency and FWD will appear on the display. You mode. If this pushbutton is pressed additional times or may select stations during forward operation by using held, the radio will go to the displayed number of TUNE, SEEK or PSCAN. previous selections up to 9. SEEK and a negative number will appear on the display. Your tape must 5 SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side of have at least three seconds of silence between each the tape. selection for previous to work. The sound will mute 6 D: Press this pushbutton to reduce background while seeking. noise. NR ON will appear on the display. Press it again 2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next to turn Dolby B off. NR OFF will appear on the display. selection on the tape. If you press the pushbutton more Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license than once, the player will continue moving forward from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby through the tape. SEEK and a positive number will and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby appear on the display. Your tape must have at least Laboratories Licensing Corporation. three seconds of silence between each selection for next to work. The sound will mute while seeking.

3-30 A SEEK ": The right arrow is the same as the NEXT Cassette Tape Messages pushbutton, and the left arrow is the same as the PREV CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If this message appears on pushbutton. If the arrows are held or pressed more than the radio display, the tape won’t play because of one of once, the player will continue moving forward or the following errors. backward through the tape. SEEK and a positive or negative number will appear on the display. D The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the open BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio end down and try to turn the right hub when a tape is playing. The tape will stop but remain counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over in the player. and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your tape TAPE CD: Press this button to play a tape when may be damaged and should not be used in the listening to the radio. Press TAPE CD to switch between player. Try a new tape to make sure your player is the tape and compact disc if both are loaded. The working properly. inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio D The tape is broken. Try a new tape. for future listening. D The tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attempt EJT (Eject): Press this button, located to the right to get the cassette out. Try a new tape. of the cassette tape slot, to stop a tape when it is playing or to eject a tape when it is not playing. Eject may be CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, the activated with the radio off. Cassette tapes may be cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play loaded with the radio off if this button is pressed first. tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be corrected, contact your dealer.

3-31 CD Adapter Kits 1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit previous track if the current track has been playing for with your cassette tape player after disabling the less than eight seconds. If this pushbutton is pressed and tight/loose tape sensing feature on your tape player. the current track has been playing for more than eight seconds, it will go to the beginning of the current track. To disable the feature, use the following steps: TRACK and the track number will appear on the 1. Turn the radio off. display. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once, the player will continue moving back through the 2. Press and hold the TAPE CD button. The radio will disc. The sound will mute while seeking. display READY and flash the cassette icon. 2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track. 3. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It will power TRACK and the track number will appear on the up the radio and begin playing. display. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than This override routine will remain active until EJT once, the player will continue moving forward through is pressed. the disc. The sound will mute while seeking. 3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to Playing a Compact Disc reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at player will pull it in and the disc should begin playing. six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for The display will show the CD symbol. If you want to more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the normal insert a compact disc with the ignition off, first press playing speed. Release it to play the passage. The DISP or EJT. display will show ET and the elapsed time. If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc Messages” later in this section.

3-32 4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to TAPE CD: Press this button to play a CD when advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this listening to the radio. Press TAPE CD to switch between pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at six the tape and compact disc if both are loaded. The times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the for future listening. normal playing speed. Release it to play the passage. EJT (Eject): Press this button, located to the right The display will show ET and the elapsed time. of the CD slot, to eject a CD. Eject may be activated with 6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the either the ignition or radio off. CDs may be loaded with tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM the radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first. ON will appear on the display. RDM T and the track number will appear on the display when each track starts Compact Disc Messages to play. Press it again to turn off random play. RDM If the disc comes out, it could be for one of the OFF will appear on the display. following reasons: A SEEK ": The right arrow is the same as the NEXT D If you’re driving on a very rough road. When the pushbutton, and the left arrow is the same as the PREV road becomes smooth the disc should play. pushbutton. If either of the SEEK arrows is held or D If it’s very hot. When the temperature returns to pressed more then once, the player will continue moving normal, the disc should play. backward or forward through the CD. D The disc is upside down. DISP (Display): Press this knob to see how long the D It is dirty, scratched or wet. current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed time D will appear on the display. To change what is normally The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and shown on the display (track or elapsed time), press this try again.) knob until you see the display you want, then hold this D If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep. reason, try a known good CD. BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a disc If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be is playing. The disc will stop but remain in the player. corrected, contact your dealer. 3-33 AM-FM Stereo with Six-Disc Compact Disc Playing the Radio Player with Programmable Equalization and PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on Radio Data System (RDS) (If Equipped) and off. VOLUME: Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): Your system has a feature called automatic volume. With this feature, your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to select MIN, MED or MAX. Each higher choice allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then, as you drive, automatic volume increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed. The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive. If you don’t want to use automatic volume, select OFF. RCL (Recall): Push this knob to display the station being played or to display the clock. Pushing this knob with the ignition off will display the clock.

3-34 Finding a Station Setting Preset Stations AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to and FM2. The display shows your selection. your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations. (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the following steps: t SEEK u: Press the right or left arrow to go to the next or previous station and stay there. The sound will 1. Turn the radio on. mute while seeking. 2. Press AM FM to select AM, FM1 or FM2. t SCAN u: Press and hold either SCAN arrow for 3. Tune in the desired station. two seconds until SC appears on the display and you 4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization that best hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play for a few suits the type of station selected. seconds, then go on to the next station. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning. If you press SCAN 5. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons for more than four seconds, the radio will change to until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that preset scan mode. The sound will mute while scanning. numbered pushbutton, the station you set will return and the equalization that you selected will also be To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN automatically selected for that pushbutton. arrow for more than four seconds, PRESET SCAN will appear on the display. You will hear a double beep. 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. The radio will go to a preset station stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning presets. The sound will mute while scanning.

3-35 Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) To return to the manual mode (CUSTOM), press the AUDIO: Push the AUDIO knob until BASS, MID or AUTO EQ button until CUSTOM appears on the TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to increase display. Then you will be able to manually adjust the or decrease. When you use this knob, the radio’s tone bass, midrange and treble using the AUDIO knob. setting will switch to custom. If a station is weak or Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) noisy, you may want to decrease the treble. AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right and To adjust bass, midrange or treble to the middle left speakers, push the AUDIO knob until BAL appears position, select BASS, MID or TREB and push and hold on the display. Turn the knob to adjust the sound to the the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one beep and left or right speakers. The middle position balances the adjust the display level to zero. sound between the speakers. To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers, position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone push and hold the AUDIO knob until FAD appears on or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce the display. Turn the knob to adjust the sound to the one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display. front or rear speakers. The middle position balances the AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): This feature sound between the speakers. allows you to choose preset bass, midrange and treble To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position, equalization settings designed for country, jazz, talk, select balance or fade and push and hold the AUDIO pop, rock and classical program types. knob. The radio will beep once and will adjust the The program type last chosen will appear on the display display level to the middle position. when you first press AUTO EQ. Each time you press To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle this button, another program type will appear on the position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when tone display and AUTO EQ will switch to one of the preset or speaker controls are not displayed. The radio will program types. produce one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display.

3-36 Using RDS Finding a PTY Station Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data P-TYPE (Program Type): This button is used to turn System (RDS). RDS mode gives you many useful new on and off Program Type (PTY) selections. PTY and the features. With RDS, the radio can do the following: light next to the button will turn on. The last selected D Seek only to stations with the types of programs you PTY will appear on the display for five seconds. want to listen to, Turn the P-TYPE knob to select the PTY you want to D seek to stations with traffic announcements, listen to. Press the SEEK arrows to find radio stations for the PTY you want to listen to. The last PTY selected D receive announcements concerning local and will be used for seek or scan modes. If a station with the national emergencies, and selected PTY is not found, NONE FOUND will appear D receive and display messages from radio stations. on the display. If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will search for stations with traffic announcements RDS features are only available for use on FM stations and the selected PTY. which broadcast RDS information. The RDS features of your radio rely upon receiving specific RDS information To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold the from these stations. These features will only work when P-TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY the RDS information is available. In rare cases, a radio you want to interrupt on. When you are listening to station may broadcast incorrect information that will a compact disc, the last selected RDS FM station will cause the radio features to work improperly. If this interrupt play if that selected program type format happens, contact the radio station. is broadcast. When you are tuned to an RDS station, the station name will appear on the display, instead of the frequency. Most RDS stations provide their station name, the time of day and a Program Type (PTY) for their current programming.

3-37 AM FM (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency RDS Messages allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the ALERT!: This type of announcement warns of national same program type. Press and hold AM FM for or local emergencies. You will not be able to turn off two seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON will alert announcements. ALERT! appears on the display appear on the display. The radio may switch to stronger when an alert announcement plays. When an alert stations. Press and hold AM FM again for two seconds announcement comes on the current radio station, you to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF will appear on will hear it, even if the volume is muted or a compact the display. The radio will not switch to other stations. disc is playing. If the compact disc player is playing, When you turn the ignition off and then on again, play will stop for the announcement and resume when the alternate frequency feature will automatically be the announcement is finished. turned on. INFO (Information): If the current station has a Setting PTY Preset Stations message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your button to see the message. If the whole message does favorite PTYs. These buttons have factory PTY presets. not appear on the display, parts of the message will You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2) by appear every three seconds until the message is performing the following steps: completed. To see the parts of the message faster than every three seconds, press this button again. A new 1. Press AM FM to select FM1 or FM2. group of words will appear on the display. Once the 2. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program complete message has been displayed, INFO will type mode. disappear from the display until another new message is received. 3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY. 4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton, the PTY you set will return. 5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. 3-38 TRAF (Traffic): Press this button to receive traffic 3. Wait for the light, located to the right of the slot, to announcements. The traffic announcement brackets will turn green. appear on the display. TRAF will appear on the display 4. Load a disc. Insert a disc partway into the slot, label if the current station broadcasts traffic announcements. side up. The player will pull the disc in. If the current station does not broadcast traffic announcements, the radio will seek to a station that When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be does. When the radio finds a station that broadcasts displayed. If you select an equalization setting for your traffic announcements, it will stop. If no station is found, disc, it will be activated each time you play a disc. NONE FOUND will appear on the display. If the radio is on or off, the disc will begin to When a traffic announcement comes on the current radio play automatically. station or a related network station, you will hear it, even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is To insert multiple discs, do the following: playing. If the compact disc player was being used, the 1. Turn the ignition on. compact disc will stay in the player and resume play at 2. Press and hold the LOAD side of the LOAD CD the point where it stopped. button for two seconds. Playing a Compact Disc You will hear a beep and the light, located to the If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc right of the slot, will begin to flash. Messages” later in this section. 3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green, load a LOAD CD : Press the LOAD side of this button to disc. Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. load CDs into the compact disc player. This compact The player will pull the disc in. disc player will hold up to six discs. Once the disc is loaded, the light will begin flashing To insert one disc, do the following: again. Once the light stops flashing and turns green 1. Turn the ignition on. you can load another disc. The disc player takes up to six discs. Do not try to load more than six. 2. Press and release the LOAD side of the LOAD CD button. 3-39 To load more than one disc but less than six, complete LOAD CD (Eject): The CD eject side of this Steps 1 through 3. When you have finished loading button will eject a disc or discs, if you have multiple discs, with the radio on or off, press the LOAD side of discs loaded. To eject a disc or discs from the disc the LOAD CD button to cancel the loading function. player, perform one of the following steps: The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded. D Press and release the CD eject side of the LOAD CD When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be button to eject the disc that is currently playing, or displayed. If more than one disc has been loaded, a D number for each disc will be displayed. If you select an to eject all of the discs, press the CD eject side of the equalization setting for your disc, it will be activated LOAD CD button for two seconds, you will hear a each time you play a disc. beep, and the light will flash to let you know when a disc is being ejected. If the radio is on or off, the last disc loaded will begin to play automatically. When the CD eject side of the LOAD CD button is pressed, the receiver will eject the disc and REMOVE As each new track starts to play, the track number will CD will be displayed. You can now remove the disc. If appear on the display. the disc is not removed, after 25 seconds, the disc will be automatically pulled back into the receiver. If you try Playing a Specific Loaded Compact Disc to push the disc back into the receiver, before the 25 For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the radio second time period is complete, the receiver will sense display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX an error and will try to eject the disc several times button to start playing a CD. Then press the numbered before stopping. pushbutton that corresponds to the CD you want to play. Do not repeatedly press the CD eject side of the LOAD A small bar will appear under the CD number that is CD eject button to eject a disc after you have tried to playing, and the track number will appear. push it in manually. The receivers 25-second eject timer If an error appears on the radio display, see “Compact will reset at each press of eject, which will cause the Disc Messages” later in this section. receiver to not eject the disc until the 25-second time period has elapsed.

3-40 Once the player stops and the disc is ejected, remove the RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to the disc. After removing the disc, press the PWR knob off tracks in random, rather than sequential order, on one and then on again. This will clear the disc-sensing disc or on all of the discs. To use random, do one of feature and enable discs to be loaded into the the following: player again. D To play the tracks on the disc you are listening to in % REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to reverse random order, press and hold RDM for more than quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a reduced two seconds. You will hear a beep and RANDOM volume. Release it to play the passage. The display will ONE will appear on the display. Press RDM again to show elapsed time. turn if off. FWD & (Forward): Press and hold this button to D Press and release the RDM button to play the tracks advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a on all of the discs that are loaded in random order. reduced volume. Release it to play the passage. The RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. Press display will show elapsed time. RDM to turn it off. RPT (Repeat): With repeat, you can repeat one track or AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO an entire disc. To use repeat, do the following: EQ to select the desired preset equalization setting while D To repeat the track you are listening to, press and playing a compact disc. The equalization will be release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the automatically set whenever you play a compact disc. For display. Press RPT again to turn it off. more information on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed previously in this section. D To repeat the disc you are listening to, press and hold t u the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will appear on SEEK : To seek, press the left arrow while the display. Press RPT again to turn if off. playing a CD to go to the start of the current track, if more than ten seconds have passed. Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If you press the button more than once, the player will continue moving backward or forward through the disc.

3-41 tSCAN u: To scan one disc, press and hold either Using Song List Mode SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN The integrated six-disc CD changer has a feature appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this called song list. This feature is capable of saving feature to listen to each track of the currently selected 20 track selections. disc for ten seconds. The sound will mute while scanning. SCAN will appear on the display. Press either To save tracks into the song list feature, perform the SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning. following steps: To scan all loaded discs, press and hold either SCAN 1. Turn the disc player on and load it with at least one arrow for more than four seconds until DISC SCAN disc. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this section for more information. feature to listen to the first track, for ten seconds for 2. Check to see that the disc changer is not in song list each disc loaded. The sound will mute while scanning to mode. S-LIST should not appear in the display. If the next track. DISC SCAN will appear on the display. S-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST button to Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning. turn it off. P-TYPE (Program Type): Press this knob to see how 3. Select the desired disc by pressing the numbered long the current track has been playing. To change what pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right is normally shown on the display (track or elapsed arrow button to locate the track that you want to time), press the knob until you see the display you want, save. The track will begin to play. then hold the knob until the display flashes. 4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two or AM FM: Press this button to play the radio when a more seconds to save the track into memory. When disc(s) is in the player. SONG LIST is pressed a beep will be heard immediately. After two seconds of pressing SONG LIST continuously, two beeps will sound to confirm that the track has been saved. 5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.

3-42 If you attempt to save more than 20 selections, S-LIST After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are FULL will appear on the display. moved up the list. When another track is added to the To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button. song list, the tracks will be added to the end of the list. One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the To delete the entire song list, perform the display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in the following steps: order that they were saved. 1. Turn the disc player on. You may seek through the song list by using the SEEK 2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on. SCAN arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will S-LIST will appear on the display. return you to the first saved track. 3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more than To delete tracks from the song list, perform the four seconds. A beep will be heard, followed by two following steps: beeps after two seconds and a final beep will be 1. Turn the disc player on. heard after four seconds. S-LIST EMPTY will 2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on. appear on the display indicating that the song list has S-LIST will appear on the display. been deleted. 3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desired If a disc is ejected, and the song list contains saved track to be deleted. tracks from that disc, those tracks are automatically deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song 4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two list again are added to the bottom of the list. seconds. When pressing SONG LIST, one beep will be heard immediately. After two seconds of pressing To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button. the SONG LIST button continuously, two beeps will One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed be heard to confirm that the track has been deleted. from the display.

3-43 Compact Disc Messages Entertainment System (Option) CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio Your vehicle may have an optional Digital Video Disc display, it could be due to one of the following reasons: (DVD) entertainment system. The entertainment system D The road is too rough. The disc should play when the works with the vehicle’s audio system and includes a road is smoother. DVD player, a video display screen, headphones and a D remote control. The entertainment system also integrates The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down. the rear climate control and rear seat audio functions. D The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and try again. Before You Drive D If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other The video entertainment system is for passengers in the reason, try a known good CD. second and third row seats only. The driver cannot safely view the video screen while driving and should If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be not try to do so. corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an error message, write it down and provide it to your In severe or extreme weather conditions your dealer when reporting the problem. entertainment system will shut down until the temperature is within the operating range. This protection feature will keep your video components from being damaged while the temperature is below -4_F (-20_C) or above 140_F (60_C). To resume operation, shut off the entertainment system, pull down the video screen and then heat or cool the vehicle until the temperature is within the operating range.

3-44 Headphones If you move too far forward, step out of the vehicle or break the “line of sight” between the headphones and The entertainment the display above the video screen, the sound in the system includes four headphones will be degraded or will cut out entirely. If dual channel, wireless the system is shut off, or the headphones are out of the headphones. The “line of sight” for more than three minutes, the headphones have an headphones will shut off automatically to preserve ON/OFF switch, a battery life. channel A/B switch If the channel switch located on the right side is on A, and a volume control. the headphones will play the DVD or auxiliary device. See “Stereo RCA Jacks” later in this section for more information. If the channel switch is on B, the headphones will play the rear seat audio system. See “Rear Seat Audio (Vehicles with the Entertainment System)” in the Index for more information. To use the headphones turn the switch located on the left side to ON. An indicator light located on the right side To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the volume will illuminate. If the light does not illuminate, the control located on the right side. batteries may need to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in this section for more information. Switch the headphones to OFF when not in use. NOTICE: Do not store the headphones in heat or direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones and would not be covered by your warranty. Keep the headphones stored in a cool place.

3-45 Battery Replacement insert the DVD into the DVD player. The system will To change the batteries, do the following: automatically switch to DVD and start to play. To return to the auxiliary device, just press the stop button to stop 1. Slide open the battery door located on the left side of the DVD or use the remote control. See “Remote the headphones. Control” later in this section for more information. 2. Remove the batteries from the compartment. Audio Speakers 3. Replace the two AAA batteries. Make sure that they Only one audio source can be heard through the are installed correctly. speakers at one time. If the headphones are to be stored for a long period Audio from the radio, cassette or CD player will be of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool, heard through all speakers when the front audio system dry place. is being used and the rear seat audio system is off. Stereo RCA Jacks Sound from the DVD player or an auxiliary device can The RCA jacks are located on the faceplate of the DVD be heard through all speakers when the front audio player. They allow you to hook up an auxiliary device system and rear seat audio are off and a DVD or such as a camcorder or a video game unit. You may auxiliary device is playing. require adapter connectors or cables to connect your When the front audio system is on, to hear the DVD, auxiliary device to the RCA jacks. Refer to the auxiliary device or the rear seat audio system you must manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage. use the headphones. With the rear seat audio system on, The entertainment system will always start in the the speaker in the overhead console and the rear auxiliary mode. To use the auxiliary function, connect a speakers are muted. camcorder or a video game unit to the RCA jacks and The speaker in the overhead console is set at a low level turn on the auxiliary device. If you want to view a DVD, and is not intended to be heard at a high volume.

3-46 Video Screen The video screen is located in the overhead console. To use the video screen, do the following: 1. Push forward on the release button and the screen will fold down. 2. Pull the screen toward you and adjust its position as desired. When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its locked position. If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked position, the screen will shut off, but the DVD will continue to play through the previously selected audio source.

NOTICE:

Avoid directly touching the video screen, as damage may occur. Do not touch the video screen. See “Cleaning the Video Screen” in the Index for more information.

3-47 DVD Player The DVD player works while the ignition is in RUN or ACCESSORY and while RAP is active. See “Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” in the Index for more information. The entertainment system is only compatible with DVDs authorized for use in the United States and Canada. Regular audio CDs can also be played by the DVD player. Home recorded CDs (CDRs) may not play in this DVD player. Try the audio system CD player instead. DVD Player Buttons PWR (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD player on, to change to an auxiliary device or to turn the system off. (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play. The DVD player is located in the front floor console. Press while playing to pause. Press it again to continue The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on playing. the DVD player and by the buttons on the remote control. See “Remote Control” later in this section (Stop/Eject): Press this button to stop playing. for more information. Press the button a second time to eject the disc.

3-48 Playing a Disc Ejecting a Disc To play a disc, gently insert the disc (with the label Press the stop/eject button on the DVD player once to side up) into the loading slot until it stops. The DVD stop and a second time to eject the disc. player will continue loading the disc and the player will If a disc is ejected from the player, but not removed, automatically start. the DVD player will reload the disc after a short period If a disc is already in the player, press the play/pause of time. button on the face of the player or on the remote control. Remote Control Some DVDs will not allow you to fast forward or skip the copyright or previews. Some DVDs will To use the remote control, aim it at the display above the begin playing after the previews have finished. If the video screen and press the desired button. Direct DVD does not begin playing refer to the sunlight or very bright light may affect the ability of the on-screen instructions. entertainment system to receive signals from the remote control. Be sure the remote’s batteries are not Stopping and Resuming Playback discharged, as this will also affect the function of the To stop a disc, press the stop/eject button on the DVD remote control. Objects blocking the line of sight may player. To resume playback, press the play/pause button. also affect the function of the remote control. As long as you have not ejected the disc, it will resume playback from the point where it was stopped. If the disc has been ejected, the player will start playing at the NOTICE: beginning of the disc. Do not store the remote control in heat or direct sunlight. This could damage the remote control and would not be covered by your warranty. Keep the remote control stored in a cool place.

3-49 Remote Control Buttons Fwd/ Rev (Fast Forward/Reverse): Press the right arrow button to fast forward the disc. Press the left Volume : Press arrow button for reverse. The right or left arrow buttons the up or down will fast forward or reverse DVDs in small amounts. To arrow to increase or resume playback, press the button again or press the decrease volume. play/pause button. You can also press and hold the right or left arrow buttons to fast forward or reverse. When you let go of the button, the disc will resume playback. These buttons may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright or the previews. Next/ Prev (Next/Previous): Press the up arrow button to select the next chapter. Press the down arrow button to select the previous chapter. These buttons may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright or the previews. (Play/Pause): Press this button to play a disc. Press this button while a disc is playing to pause. Press it Menu: Press this button to view the media menu. The again to continue playing. If you press and hold this media menu is different on every disc. Use the up and button for three seconds or more, the DVD player will down and the right and left arrow buttons to move the turn off. cursor around the media menu. After making your selection, press Enter. Some discs may contain a short skit leading up to the media menu.

3-50 Display: Press this button to access the DVD player (using the Menu button) or the screen format (using the setup menu. The setup menu includes the display menu, Display button). For most DVDs, the picture will fill the the dimming menu and the source menu. Use the up and entire screen if the disc format is set to standard and the down arrow buttons to navigate between menus. Use the screen format is set to FULL. right and left arrow buttons to select within a menu. To The dimming menu allows you to choose between day exit the DVD player setup menu, press the Display and night settings for the video screen. button again, or wait for the menu to time out. The source menu allows you to switch to an auxiliary The display menu allows you to choose between the device (connected to the RCA jacks) as the source for following screen formats: the system. The DVD player setup menu is not available D FULL: The system expands the image to fill the when an auxiliary device is the source for the system. To entire screen. return to DVD as the source for the system, press the D NORMAL: The picture on the screen is displayed play/pause button on the remote control or DVD player. using the default settings on the disc. Battery Replacement D CINEMA: The system expands the image to fill the To change the batteries, do the following: screen in the horizontal direction only. With most DVDs, this will leave black strips at the top and 1. Slide open the battery door located on the back of bottom of the screen. the remote control. D ZOOM: The system takes the central two-thirds of 2. Remove the batteries from the compartment. the picture and expands this to fill the entire screen. 3. Replace the two AAA batteries. Make sure that they Some combinations of disc format and display format are installed correctly. may result in image stretching or black strips around If the remote control is to be stored for a long period the picture. This is normal. To eliminate excessive of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool, stretching or black strips, change the disc format dry place.

3-51 Rear Seat Audio (Vehicles without the Rear Seat Radio Controls Entertainment System) (If Equipped) This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to and control any of the music sources: AM-FM, cassette tapes and CDs. However, the rear seat passengers can only control the music sources that the front seat passengers are not listening to. For example, rear seat passengers may listen to a cassette tape or CD through the two sets of headphones, (provided in the glove box), while the driver listens to the radio through the front speakers. The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for each set of headphones. Be aware that the front seat audio controls always have priority over the RSA controls. If the front seat passengers switch the source for the main The following functions are controlled by the RSA radio to a remote source, the RSA will play the same system buttons: remote source. The rear speakers will be muted when the PWR (Power): Press this button to turn RSA on or off. RSA power is turned on. You may operate the RSA functions even when the main radio is off. VOL (Volume): Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume and Primary Radio Controls counterclockwise to decrease volume. Push the knob back into its stored position when you’re not using it. The following function is controlled by the knob on the The upper VOL knob controls the left headphone and main radio: the lower VOL knob controls the right headphone. PWR (Power): Push this knob twice to turn RSA off.

3-52 AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 P.SET PROG (Preset Program): The front passengers and FM2. If the front passengers are already listening to must be listening to something different for each of AM FM, the RSA controller will not switch between the these functions to work: bands and cannot change the frequency. Press this D Press this button to scan through the preset radio button to play a cassette tape or a compact disc when stations set on the pushbuttons on the main radio. listening to the radio. The radio will go to a preset station stored on your SEEK : While listening to AM-FM, press the up pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to or down arrow to tune to the next or previous station and the next preset station. Press this button again to stay there. The sound will mute while seeking. The stop scanning presets. The sound will mute SEEK button is inactive if the AM-FM mode on the while scanning. front radio is in use. D When a cassette tape is playing, press this button to While listening to a cassette tape, press the up arrow to go to the other side of the tape. hear the next selection on the tape. Press the down arrow D When a CD is playing, press this button to select to go back to the previous selection. The SEEK button is a disc. inactive if the tape mode on the front radio is in use. TAPE CD: Press this button to switch between playing While listening to a CD, press the up arrow to hear the a cassette tape or a compact disc when listening to the next track on the CD. Press the down arrow to go back radio. The inactive tape or compact disc will remain to the start of the current track (if more than eight safely inside the radio for future listening. seconds have played). The SEEK button is inactive if the CD mode on the front radio is in use. To scan stations, press and hold one of the SEEK arrows until the radio goes into scan mode. The radio will scan to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press SEEK again to stop scanning. The scan function is inactive if the AM FM mode on the front radio is in use. 3-53 Rear Seat Audio (Vehicles with the Rear Seat Radio Controls Entertainment System) (Option) This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to and control any of the music sources: AM-FM, cassette tapes and CDs. However, the rear seat passengers can only control the music sources that the front seat passengers are not listening to. For example, rear seat passengers may listen to a cassette tape or CD through the four sets of headphones while the driver listens to the radio through the front speakers. The rear seat The following functions are controlled by the RSA passengers have control of the volume for each set of system buttons: headphones. Be aware that the front seat audio controls always have priority over the RSA controls. If the front PWR (Power): Press this button to turn RSA on or off. seat passengers switch the source for the main radio to a The headphone symbol will appear on the display above remote source, the RSA will play the same remote the video screen when the system is on. source. The rear speakers will be muted when the RSA AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 power is turned on. You may operate the RSA functions and FM2 when the headphones are on channel B. The even when the main radio is off. selected radio station frequency will appear on the display above the video screen. If the front passengers are already listening to the radio, the RSA controller will not switch between the bands and cannot change the frequency. A ": While listening to the radio, press the right or left arrow to tune to the next or previous station and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking. These arrows are inactive if the AM-FM mode on the front radio is in use.

3-54 While listening to a cassette tape, press the right arrow D If your vehicle has the AM-FM Stereo with Cassette to hear the next selection on the tape. Press the left Tape and Compact Disc Player with Radio Data arrow to go back to the previous selection. These arrows Systems (RDS) and Automatic Tone Control, press are inactive if the tape mode on the front radio is in use. this button to go to the other side of a tape when a While listening to a CD, press the right arrow to hear the cassette tape is playing. next track on the CD. Press the left arrow to go back to D If your vehicle has the AM-FM Stereo with Six-Disc the start of the current track (if more than eight seconds Compact Disc Player with Programmable Equalization have played). These arrows are inactive if the CD mode and Radio Data Systems (RDS), press this button to go on the front radio is in use. to a different CD when a CD is playing. P.SET SCAN (Preset Scan): The front passengers must CD TAPE: Press this button to switch between playing be listening to something different for each of these a cassette tape, a compact disc, a DVD or an auxiliary functions to work: device when the headphones are on channel B. If one of D Press this button to scan through the preset radio the devices is not loaded, the system will skip over the stations set on the pushbuttons on the main radio. device when this button is pressed. The radio will go to a preset station stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset station. This feature will only scan the presets that are in the selected band. Press this button again to stop scanning presets. The selected radio station frequency will appear on the display above the video screen. The sound will mute while scanning.

3-55 Theft-Deterrent Feature Non-RDS Radios Understanding Radio Reception R THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your AM radio. The feature works automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will not especially at night. The longer range, however, can operate and LOCKED will be displayed. cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try With THEFTLOCK activated, your radio will not reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it. operate if stolen. FM Stereo Theft-Deterrent Feature RDS Radios R FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall radio. The feature works automatically by learning a buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). the sound to come and go. If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will not operate and LOCKED will be displayed. Understanding DVD Distortion When the ignition is off and RAP is not active, the You may experience video distortion when operating blinking red light indicates that THEFTLOCK is armed. cellular phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position With THEFTLOCK activated, your radio will not Systems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or operate if stolen. walkie talkies. It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle. * Excludes the OnStarR System.

3-56 Tips About Your Audio System Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable NOTICE: until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud Before you add any sound equipment to your and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by vehicle -- like a tape player, CB radio, mobile adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe telephone or two-way radio -- be sure you can sound level before your hearing adapts to it. add what you want. If you can, it’s very To help avoid hearing loss or damage do the following: important to do it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of 1. Adjust the volume knob to the lowest setting. your vehicle’s engine, Delphi Electronics radio or 2. Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably other systems, and even damage them. Your and clearly. vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly. So, before adding sound equipment, check with your dealer and be sure to check federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units.

3-57 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player When cleaning the cassette tape player with the recommended non-abrasive cleaning cassette, it is A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause possible that the cassette may eject, because the cut tape reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged detection feature on your radio may recognize it as a mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their broken tape. To prevent the cleaning cassette from being cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and ejected, use the following steps: extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape player. 1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY. Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every 2. Turn the radio off. 50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate 3. Press and hold the TAPE CD button for five seconds. that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without READY will appear on the display for five seconds. resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on the display, your cassette tape player needs to be 4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette. cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as 5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and recommended cleaning time. player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut tape player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement detection feature is active again. in sound quality, clean the tape player. You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type The recommended cleaning method for your cassette cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean tape player is the use of a scrubbing action, the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner. The recommended cleaning cassette is available through The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning your dealer (GM Part No. 12344789). cassette is not recommended.

3-58 After you clean the player, press and hold the EJT Cleaning Your DVD Player button for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to show the indicator was reset. When cleaning the outside DVD cabinet face and buttons, use only a clean cloth dampened with Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality clean water. may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape Cleaning the Video Screen player serviced. When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth Care of Your Compact Discs and DVDs dampened with clean water. Use care when directly touching or cleaning the screen, as damage may result. Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight Fixed Mast Antenna and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and without being damaged. If the mast should ever become clean it, wiping from the center to the edge. slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. If the Be sure never to touch the side without writing when mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges replace it. or the edge of the hole and the outer edge. Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still Care of Your Compact Disc and tightened to the fender. If tightening is required, tighten DVD Player by hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn. The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.

3-59 Section 4 Your Driving and the Road

Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also included many other useful tips on driving.

4-2 Defensive Driving 4-18 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 4-3 Drunken Driving 4-21 City Driving 4-6 Control of a Vehicle 4-22 Freeway Driving 4-6 Braking 4-23 Before Leaving on a Long Trip 4-9 Traction Control System (Option) 4-24 Highway Hypnosis 4-11 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System (Option) 4-24 Hill and Mountain Roads 4-11 Steering 4-26 Winter Driving 4-13 Off-Road Recovery 4-30 Recreational Vehicle Towing 4-14 Passing 4-32 Loading Your Vehicle 4-15 Loss of Control 4-34 Towing a Trailer 4-16 Driving at Night

4- 4-1 Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.” On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means “always expect the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do. Be ready for their mistakes. Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly. Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving task -- such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on the Defensive Driving floor -- makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury. The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull Drive defensively. off the road in a safe place to do them yourself. Please start with a very important safety device in your These simple defensive driving techniques could save vehicle: Buckle up. See “Safety Belts” in the Index. your life.

4-2 Drunken Driving The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims might think. Although it depends on each person every year. and situation, here is some general information on Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive the problem. a vehicle: The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone D Judgment who is drinking depends upon four things: D Muscular Coordination D The amount of alcohol consumed D Vision D The drinker’s body weight D Attentiveness. D The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, D The length of time it has taken the drinker to these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking consume the alcohol. and driving. In recent years, about 16,000 annual motor According to the American Medical Association, a vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use 180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured. (355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so they same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol. (45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka. There are good medical, psychological and developmental reasons for these laws.

4-3 Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks. The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent. The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them. But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if many people are impaired at a BAC approaching the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces 0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent. BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision consumes food just before or during drinking will have a increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of somewhat lower BAC level. 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of a lower relative percentage of body water than men. this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater! 4-4 The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold CAUTION: showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street? Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and to react quickly enough to avoid the collision. judgment can be affected by even a small amount There’s something else about drinking and driving that of alcohol. You can have a serious -- or even many people don’t know. Medical research shows that fatal -- collision if you drive after drinking. alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if heart. This means that when anyone who has been you’re with a group, designate a driver who will drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that not drink. person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking.

4-5 Control of a Vehicle Braking You have three systems that make your vehicle go where Braking action involves perception time and you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and reaction time. the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal. at the places where the tires meet the road. That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your foot and do it. That’s reaction time. Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important. And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied. Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose control of your vehicle. Also see “Traction Control System” in the Index. 4-6 Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between electronic braking system that will help prevent a hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you braking skid. do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while better braking and longer brake life. this test is going on, and you may even notice that your If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal. normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the If there’s a problem with the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine anti-lock brake system, this stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But warning light will stay on. you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is See “Anti-Lock Brake used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal System Warning Light” in will be harder to push. the Index.

4-7 The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could. The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.

Let’s say the road is wet and you’re driving safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking. Here’s what happens with ABS: A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on separately work the brakes at each wheel. wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.

4-8 Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need Traction Control System (Option) to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in Your vehicle may have a traction control system that front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave road conditions. The system operates only if it senses enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or anti-lock brakes. beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the system works the front brakes and reduces engine power Using Anti-Lock to limit wheel spin. Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down The TRACTION ACTIVE message will come on when firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel a the traction control system is limiting wheel spin. See slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise, but “TRACTION ACTIVE Message” in the Index. You may this is normal. feel or hear the system working, but this is normal. Braking in Emergencies If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same control will automatically disengage. When road time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may than even the very best braking. reengage the cruise control. See “Cruise Control” in the Index.

4-9 To turn the system off, press the TCS button in the instrument panel switchbank.

United States Canada

If this message comes on and stays on or comes on while you are driving, there’s a problem with your traction control system. See “Service Traction System Warning Message” in If the system is limiting wheel spin when you press the the Index. When this warning message is on, the button, the message will go off, but the system will not TRAC OFF light will come on to remind you that turn off until there is no longer a current need to limit the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your wheel spin. The TRAC OFF light will come on to driving accordingly. remind you the system is off. You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing the button again. The The traction control system automatically comes on traction control system warning message should go off. whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should always leave the system on. But you can turn the traction control system off if you ever need to. You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is required. See “Rocking Your Vehicle” in the Index.

4-10 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Steering System (Option) Power Steering If your vehicle has all-wheel drive (AWD), the AWD If you lose power steering assist because the engine system operates automatically without any action stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but required by the driver. If the front drive wheels begin to it will take much more effort. slip, the rear wheels will automatically begin to drive the vehicle as required. There may be a slight Steering Tips engagement noise during hard use but this is normal. During heavy AWD applications, the engine torque may Driving on Curves be reduced to protect AWD system components. If the It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed. vehicle is exposed to extended heavy AWD usage, the AWD system will shut itself off to protect the system A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on from overheating. When the system cools down, the the news happen on curves. Here’s why: AWD system will activate itself again automatically; Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to this cool-down can take up to 20 minutes depending on the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The outside temperature and vehicle use. See “AWD Disable traction of the tires against the road surface makes it Warning Message” in the Index. possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this. The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.

4-11 Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Steering in Emergencies Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and acceleration -- have to do their There are times when steering can be more effective work where the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden than braking. For example, you come over a hill and acceleration can demand too much of those places. You find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls can lose control. Refer to “Traction Control System” in out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between the Index. parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop in What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room. accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it That’s the time for evasive action -- steering around to go, and slow down. the problem. Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are these. First apply your brakes. See “Braking in based on good weather and road conditions. Under less Emergencies” earlier in this section. It is better to favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower. remove as much speed as you can from a possible If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front right depending on the space available. wheels are straight ahead. Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway.

4-12 Off-Road Recovery You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.

An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the avoided the object. pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so The fact that such emergency situations are always that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. You possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn until the all times and wear safety belts properly. right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

4-13 Passing D Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing, The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a following too closely reduces your area of vision, two-lane highway waits for just the right moment, especially if you’re following a larger vehicle. accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes Also, you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver? ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane reasonable distance. highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the D When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in get too close. Time your move so you will be judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can increasing speed as the time comes to move into the suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision. “running start” that more than makes up for the So here are some tips for passing: distance you would lose by dropping back. And if D something happens to cause you to cancel your pass, “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and you need only slow down and drop back again and to crossroads for situations that might affect your wait for another opportunity. passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait for a better time. D If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait D your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines. pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle. If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a Remember to glance over your shoulder and check turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken the blind spot. center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line, even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.

4-14 D Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and Skidding start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving” and move back into the right lane. (Remember that those conditions. But skids are always possible. your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s just passed may seem to be farther away from you three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels than it really is.) aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too D Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too next vehicle. much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin. D Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may the accelerator pedal. If you have the “Traction Control be slowing down or starting to turn. System,” remember: It helps avoid only the acceleration D skid. If you do not have this system, or if the system is If you’re being passed, make it easy for the off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled by following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. can ease a little to the right. If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the Loss of Control accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the Let’s review what driving experts say about what vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the second skid if it occurs. tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked. In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger. 4-15 Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, Driving at Night gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited. While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow on the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and slow down when you have any doubt. Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps avoid only the braking skid.

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.

4-16 Here are some tips on night driving. You can be temporarily blinded by approaching D Drive defensively. headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you D Don’t drink and drive. are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who D Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with glare from headlamps behind you. misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps. D Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle other vehicles. clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much D worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes headlamps can light up only so much road ahead. lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, D In remote areas, watch for animals. making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly. D If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a and rest. roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be driver may require at least twice as much light to see the checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes same thing at night as a 20-year-old. be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and What you do in the daytime can also affect your night aren’t even aware of it. vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot of things invisible. 4-17 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads. And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement. The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road and even people walking. It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.

4-18 CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle. After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally.

Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, Driving too fast through large water puddles or even it has little or no contact with the road. going through some car washes can cause problems, too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.

4-19 Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your Driving Through Flowing Water tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone CAUTION: poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning. Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces. If Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There you try to drive through flowing water, as you just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can be best advice is to slow down when it is raining. carried away. As little as six inches of flowing Driving Through Deep Standing Water water can carry away a smaller vehicle. If this happens, you and the other vehicle occupants could drown. Don’t ignore police warning signs, NOTICE: and otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water. If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water, water can come in through your engine’s air intake and badly damage your Some Other Rainy Weather Tips engine. Never drive through water that is slightly D Turn on your low-beam headlamps -- not just your lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you parking lamps -- to help make you more visible to others. can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive D Besides slowing down, allow some extra following through them very slowly. distance. And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray. D Have good tires with proper tread depth. See “Tires” in the Index. 4-20 City Driving One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals. Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving: D Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross-country trip. D Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You’ll save time and energy. See the next part, “Freeway Driving.” D Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it. When a light turns green, and just before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light.

4-21 Freeway Driving At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow. Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass. Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use your turn signal. Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your “blind” spot. Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, slightly slower at night. expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules. When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not, The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same the next exit. speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply. left lane on a freeway as a passing lane. 4-22 The exit speed is usually posted. Here are some things you can check before a trip: Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not D Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance Are all windows clean inside and outside? at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going D Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape? slower than you actually are. D Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked Before Leaving on a Long Trip all levels? Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you D Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean? must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a day’s D work -- don’t plan to make too many miles that first part Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for can easily drive in. long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure? Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it D serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook service, have it done before starting out. Of course, along your route? Should you delay your trip a short you’ll find experienced and able service experts in time to avoid a major storm system? Chevrolet dealerships all across North America. D Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps? They’ll be ready and willing to help if you need it.

4-23 Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever. There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second, and you could crash and be injured. What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be aware that it can happen. Then here are some tips: D Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool interior. Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from D Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and driving in flat or rolling terrain. to the sides. Check your mirrors and your instruments frequently. D If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency. 4-24 If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make CAUTION: your trips safer and more enjoyable. D Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to and transaxle. These parts can work hard on do all the work of slowing down. They could get mountain roads. so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would D Know how to go down hills. The most important then have poor braking or even none going down thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the a hill. You could crash. Always have your engine slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go running and your vehicle in gear when you down a steep or long hill. go downhill.

D Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down CAUTION: to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine and transaxle, and you can climb the hill better. If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get D Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut then have poor braking or even none going across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let you stay in your own lane. your engine assist your brakes on a steep D As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be downhill slope. something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident. D You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action. 4-25 Winter Driving Here are some tips for winter driving: D Have your vehicle in good shape for winter. D You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle. Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle.

4-26 Driving on Snow or Ice What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the road probably have good traction. least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and freezing (32_F; 0_C) and freezing rain begins to fall. the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be can get there. very careful. Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing or loose snow -- drive with caution. If you have traction control, keep the system on. It will improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road. But you can turn the traction system off if you ever need to. You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow. See “Rocking Your Vehicle” in the Index. Even though your vehicle has a traction system, you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions. See “Traction Control System” in the Index. If you don’t have a traction system, accelerate gently. Try not to break the gentle traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more.

4-27 Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability If You’re Caught in a Blizzard when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index. D Allow greater following distance on any slippery road. D Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a serious situation. You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe: D Turn on your hazard flashers.

4-28 D Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you’ve been stopped by the snow. CAUTION: D Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you. If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle. insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill tuck under your clothing to keep warm. you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around again from time to time to be sure snow doesn’t collect there. Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful. restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

4-29 Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost Here are some important things to consider before you all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again do recreational vehicle towing: and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable D What’s the towing capacity of the towing from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the vehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehicle fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get manufacturer’s recommendations. out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes. D How far will you tow? Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow. Recreational Vehicle Towing D Do you have the proper towing equipment? See your Recreational vehicle towing means towing your dealer or trailering professional for additional advice vehicle behind another vehicle -- such as behind a and equipment recommendations. motorhome. The two most common types of D recreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghy Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you would towing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll want to ground) and “dolly towing” (towing your vehicle with make sure your vehicle is prepared to be towed. See two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a “Before Leaving on a Long Trip” in the Index. device known as a “dolly”). With the proper preparation and equipment, many vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

4-30 Dinghy Towing Dolly Towing Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all of its If you have a two-wheel-drive vehicle, it can be towed wheels on the ground. If you have a two-wheel-drive with two of its wheels on the ground. To dolly tow your vehicle, it can be towed with two of its wheels on the vehicle, do the following: ground. See “Dolly Towing” following. If you have an 1. Put the front wheels on a dolly. all-wheel-drive vehicle, it cannot be towed with any of its wheels on the ground. It can be towed with car 2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P). carrier equipment. 3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key. 4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position NOTICE: with a clamping device designed for towing. 5. Release the parking brake. Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all four If you have an all wheel drive vehicle, it cannot be wheels on the ground, or even with only two of its - - towed with any of its wheels on the ground. It can be wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain towed with car carrier equipment. components. Don’t tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if any of its wheels will be on the ground. NOTICE:

Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain components. Don’t tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if any of its wheels will be on the ground.

4-31 Loading Your Vehicle The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles, called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline. Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle.

CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can The Certification/Tire label is found on the rear edge of break, and it can change the way your vehicle the driver’s door. handles. These could cause you to lose control The label shows the size of your original tires and the and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight of your vehicle. capacity of your vehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.

4-32 NOTICE: CAUTION:

Your warranty does not cover parts or Things you put inside your vehicle can strike components that fail because of overloading. and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash. If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases, D Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle. tools, packages or anything else -- they will go as fast as Try to spread the weight evenly. the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or D Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, if there is a crash, they’ll keep going. inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats. D Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle. D When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can. D Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you need to.

4-33 Electronic Level Control (Option) Towing a Trailer On vehicles equipped with the optional electronic level control, the rear of the vehicle is automatically kept level as you load or unload your vehicle. However, you CAUTION: should still not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR. If the engine is running or the ignition key is in If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive ACCESSORY or when retained accessory power (RAP) properly, you can lose control when you pull a is active, you may hear the compressor operating when trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the you load or unload your vehicle, and periodically as the brakes may not work well -- or even at all. You system self-adjusts. This is normal. See “Retained and your passengers could be seriously injured. Accessory Power” in the Index. Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the The compressor should operate for brief periods of time. steps in this section. Ask your dealer for advice If the sound continues for an extended period of time, and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle needs service. your vehicle. Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way. NOTICE:

Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow the advice in this part, and see your dealer for important information about towing a trailer with your vehicle.

4-34 Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify what the If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” If you do, here are some important points: that appears later in this section. But trailering is D There are many different laws, including speed limit different than just driving your vehicle by itself. restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure Trailering means changes in handling, durability and your rig will be legal, not only where you live but fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this equipment, and it has to be used properly. information can be state or provincial police. That’s the reason for this section. In it are many D Consider using a sway control if your trailer will time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. weigh 2,000 lbs. (900kg) or less. You should always Many of these are important for your safety and that of use a sway control if your trailer will weigh more your passengers. So please read this section carefully than 2,000 lbs. (900kg). You can ask a hitch dealer before you pull a trailer. about sway controls. Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle, D Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder (800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine, against the drag of the added weight. The engine is axle or other parts could be damaged. required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under D Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more, the tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your the pulling requirements. engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. D You can use THIRD (3) (or, as you need to, a lower gear) when towing a trailer. Operating your vehicle in THIRD (3) when towing a trailer will minimize heat buildup and extend the life of your transaxle.

4-35 Three important considerations have to do with weight: It depends on how you plan to use your rig. D the weight of the trailer, For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a D the weight of the trailer tongue trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any D and the weight on your vehicle’s tires. special equipment that you have on your vehicle. You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or Weight of the Trailer advice, or you can write us at: How heavy can a trailer safely be? Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center It should never weigh more than 1,400 lbs. (630 kg) P.O. Box 33170 with up to six occupants in the vehicle or more than Detroit, MI 48232-5170 2,000 lbs. (900 kg) with up to two occupants. If you In Canada, write to: have the optional trailer towing package, your vehicle can tow up to 2,900 lbs. (1 300 kg) with up to General Motors of Canada Limited six occupants or up to 3,500 lbs. (1 575 kg) with up to Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 two occupants. But even that can be too heavy. 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

4-36 Weight of the Trailer Tongue If you’re using a weight-carrying or a weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue weight (A) The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded weight to measure because it affects the total or gross trailer weight (B). Do not exceed the maximum weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight allowable tongue weight for your vehicle. (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are must add the tongue load to the GVW because your proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading simply by moving some items around in the trailer. Your Vehicle” in the Index for more information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity. Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the Certification/Tire label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or see “Tire Loading” in the Index. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.

4-37 Hitches Safety Chains It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment. You should always attach chains between your vehicle Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting some rules to follow: the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. D The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended for Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. bumper-type hitches to them. Use only a Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the the bumper. bumper. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig. Never allow safety chains to drag on D If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will the ground. weigh more than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg), be sure to use a properly mounted, weight-carrying hitch and sway Trailer Brakes control of the proper size. This equipment is very If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg) important for proper vehicle loading and good loaded, then it needs its own brakes -- and they must be handling when you’re driving. adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for D Will you have to make any holes in the body of your the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? maintain them properly. If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when Because you have anti-lock brakes, do not try to tap into you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly your vehicle’s brake system. If you do, both brake carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get systems won’t work well, or at all. into your vehicle. See “Carbon Monoxide” in the Index. Dirt and water can, too.

4-38 Driving with a Trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of CAUTION: handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as If you have a rear-most window open and you responsive as your vehicle is by itself. pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle. You can’t see Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform (and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector, or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness or lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has death. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index. To electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and maximize your safety when towing a trailer: then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure D Have your exhaust system inspected for the brakes are working. This lets you check your leaks, and make necessary repairs before electrical connection at the same time. starting on your trip. During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the D Keep the rear-most windows closed. load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes D If exhaust does come into your vehicle are still working. through a window in the rear or another opening, drive with your front, main Following Distance heating or cooling system on and with the Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you fan on any speed. This will bring fresh, would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This outside air into your vehicle. Do not use can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking recirculation because it only recirculates and sudden turns. the air inside your vehicle. See “Comfort Controls” in the Index.

4-39 Passing When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the in advance. passed vehicle before you can return to your lane. Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer Backing Up When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. extra wiring. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your The arrows on your instrument panel will flash hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly possible, have someone guide you. hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop. Making Turns When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer NOTICE: are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are Making very sharp turns while trailering could still working. cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.

4-40 Driving On Grades Parking on Hills Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you might have to use your brakes so much that CAUTION: they would get hot and no longer work well. If you are towing a trailer that weighs more than You really should not park your vehicle, with a 1,000 lbs. (450 kg), you may prefer to drive in trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes THIRD (3) instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) wrong, your rig could start to move. People can (or, as you need to, a lower gear). This will minimize be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer heat build-up and extend the life of your transaxle. can be damaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s how to do it: 1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into PARK (P) yet. 2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels. 3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load. 4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake, and then shift to PARK (P). 5. Release the regular brakes.

4-41 When You Are Ready to Leave After Maintenance When Trailer Towing Parking on a Hill Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re 1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more while you: on this. Things that are especially important in trailer D operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill), start your engine, engine oil, belts, cooling system and brake system. D shift into a gear, and Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index D will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s release the parking brake. a good idea to review these sections before you start 2. Let up on the brake pedal. your trip. 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. are tight.

4-42 Section 5 Problems on the Road

Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.

5-2 Hazard Warning Flashers 5-12 Cooling System 5-2 Other Warning Devices 5-20 If a Tire Goes Flat 5-3 Jump Starting 5-21 Changing a Flat Tire 5-9 Towing Your Vehicle 5-37 Compact Spare Tire 5-9 Engine Overheating 5-38 If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow

5- 5-1 Hazard Warning Flashers Your hazard warning flashers button is located on top of the steering column.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in. Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to turn the flashers off. When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They signals won’t work. also let police know you have a problem. Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off. Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.

5-2 Jump Starting NOTICE: If your battery has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely. Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by On vehicles equipped with the optional power sliding your warranty. door, a low-voltage battery or replacing a battery may R cause the system to become inoperative. See “Power The ACDelco battery in your vehicle has a Sliding Door” in the Index for more information. built-in hydrometer. Do not charge, test or jump start the battery if the hydrometer looks clear or light yellow. Replace the battery when there is a CAUTION: clear or light yellow hydrometer and a cranking complaint. Batteries can hurt you. They can be Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling dangerous because: it won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle. D They contain acid that can burn you. D They contain gas that can explode or ignite. 1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt D They contain enough electricity to burn you. battery with a negative ground system. If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you.

5-3 NOTICE: NOTICE:

If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with a If you leave your radio on, it could be badly negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged. damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. 2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug each other. If they are, it could cause a ground unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to lighter or in the accessory power outlet. Turn off the start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could radio and all lamps that aren’t needed. This will damage the electrical systems. avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set could save your radio! the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in 4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the the jump start procedure. Put an automatic transaxle positive (+) and negative (-) terminal locations on in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in NEUTRAL each vehicle. before setting the parking brake. You will not need to access your battery for jump starting. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump starting terminal for that purpose.

5-4 The terminal is located under a tethered cap CAUTION: at the front of the underhood fuse and relay center. See Using a match near a battery can cause battery “Engine Compartment gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, Overview” in the Index and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if for more information you need more light. on location. Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t need to add water to the ACDelcoR battery installed in every new GM vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount Squeeze the tabs and pull up on the cap to access the of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take remote positive (+) terminal. You should always use care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could the remote positive (+) terminal instead of the be present. positive (+) terminal on your battery. Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with CAUTION: water and get medical help immediately.

An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

5-5 6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) CAUTION: terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you 7. Don’t let the other end badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts touch metal. Connect it once the engine is running. to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote 5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or positive (+) terminal if missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. the vehicle has one. The vehicles could be damaged, too. Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (-) will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative (-) terminal if the vehicle has one. Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts, too. And don’t connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks.

5-6 8. Now connect the black 9. Connect the other end negative (-) cable to the of the negative (-) negative (-) terminal of cable at least 18 inches the good battery. Use a (45 cm) away from remote negative (-) the dead battery, but terminal if the vehicle not near engine parts has one. that move.

Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next The electrical connection is just as good there, and step. The other end of the negative (-) cable doesn’t the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted much less. metal part, or to a remote negative (-) terminal on 10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the vehicle with the dead battery. the engine for a while. 11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs service.

5-7 NOTICE:

Damage to your vehicle may result from electrical shorting if jumper cables are removed incorrectly. To prevent electrical shorting, take care that the cables don’t touch each other or any other metal. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

Jumper Cable Removal A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

5-8 To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do engine coolant temperature warning message on the the following: instrument panel cluster. See “Engine Coolant 1. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the Temperature Warning Message” in the Index. vehicle that had the dead battery. Overheated Engine Protection 2. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the Operating Mode vehicle with the good battery. This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle to 3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation. vehicle with the good battery. If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheat 4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the protection mode which alternates firing groups of other vehicle. cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode, you will notice a significant loss in power and engine 5. Return the red positive (+) remote terminal cover to performance. The temperature gage will indicate an its original position. overheat condition exists. Driving extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode Towing Your Vehicle should be avoided. Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See “Roadside Assistance” in the Index. If you want to tow NOTICE: your vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome), see After driving in the overheated engine protection “Recreational Vehicle Towing” in the Index. operating mode, to avoid engine damage, allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair. Engine Overheating The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair You will find an engine coolant temperature gage on the the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset instrument panel cluster. See “Engine Coolant the oil life system. See “Engine Oil” in the Index. Temperature Gage” in the Index. You also have an 5-9 If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood. If you keep driving when your engine is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool. See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” in the Index.

5-10 If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, NOTICE: try this for a minute or so: 1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off. If your engine catches fire because you keep 2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be speed and open the window as necessary. badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty. See “Overheated 3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); Engine Protection Operating Mode” in the Index. otherwise, shift to the highest gear while driving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) or THIRD (3). If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes. steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can the engine can get a little too hot when you: drive normally. D Climb a long hill on a hot day. If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away. D Stop after high-speed driving. D If there’s still no sign of steam, idle the engine for Idle for long periods in traffic. three minutes while you’re parked. If you still have the D Tow a trailer. warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” listed previously in this section. You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away.

5-11 Cooling System When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what CAUTION: you’ll see: An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling, don’t do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

A. Radiator Pressure Cap B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans C. Coolant Recovery Tank

5-12 CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. If you do, you can be burned. Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running. If the The coolant level should be at or above the FULL engine is overheating, both fans should be running. If COLD mark. If it isn’t, you may have a leak at the they aren’t, your vehicle needs service. pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system.

5-13 How to Add Coolant to the Coolant NOTICE: Recovery Tank If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level Engine damage from running your engine isn’t at or above the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty. mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOLR See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See “Engine Mode” in the Index. Coolant” in the Index for more information.

CAUTION: NOTICE: Adding only plain water to your cooling system When adding coolant, it is important that you use can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other R only DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant. liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to the coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant system, premature engine, heater core or warning system is set for the proper coolant radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, engine coolant will require change sooner -- at your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, get the overheat warning. Your engine could whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the catch fire and you or others could be burned. use of coolant other than DEX-COOLR is not Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water R covered by your new vehicle warranty. and DEX-COOL coolant.

5-14 NOTICE: CAUTION:

In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol Use the recommended coolant and the proper and it will burn if the engine parts are hot coolant mixture. enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at or above the FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle. If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool before you do it.

5-15 CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. They are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator pressure cap -- even a little -- they can come out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and the radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.

5-16 How to Add Coolant to the Radiator

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap. 1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. CAUTION: Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops. (Don’t press down while turning the pressure cap.) You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means and it will burn if the engine parts are hot there is still some pressure left. enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

5-17 Housing Bypass Tube 3. After the engine cools, open the coolant air bleed valves. R There are two bleed valves. One is located on the 4. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL thermostat housing. The other is located on the coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck. See thermostat bypass tube. “Engine Coolant” in the Index for more information about the proper coolant mixture. If you see a stream of coolant coming from an air bleed valve, close the valve. Otherwise, close the valves after the radiator is filled. 5. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine and the compartment.

5-18 6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the 8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the engine cooling fans. filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the 7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator arrows on the pressure cap line up like this. filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper DEX-COOLR coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck.

5-19 If a Tire Goes Flat It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving, especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do: If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane. A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you’d use in a 9. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the COLD mark. accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be 10. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank. very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible. If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

5-20 Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard warning flashers.

CAUTION:

Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you or other people. You and they could be badly injured. Find a level place to change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving: 1. Set the parking brake firmly. 2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P). 3. Turn off the engine. The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and To be even more certain the vehicle won’t move, change a tire. you can put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed. That would be the tire on the other side of the vehicle, at the opposite end.

5-21 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools The tools you’ll need are located in the storage compartment at the rear of the vehicle, on the passenger’s side.

To remove the tools, do the following: A. Jack E. Jacking Instructions 1. Remove the side convenience net. B. Strap F. Bag and Tools 2. Open the jack storage compartment by lifting up the C. Bracket G. Tire Bag and Cable tab and pulling the cover off. D. Wing Nut (AWD only)

3. Remove the jack and jacking tools by loosening the wing nut and bracket. 4. Separate the plastic pouch from the jack and remove the jacking tools (folding wrench and extension) from the pouch.

5-22 The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A), A. Hoist Shaft E. Extension extension (B) and folding wrench (C). B. Hoist Assembly (Chisel End) F. Folding Wrench The compact spare tire is located under the vehicle, C. Retainer ahead of the rear bumper. See “Compact Spare Tire” D. Compact Spare Tire later in this section for more information about the compact spare. To remove the compact spare tire, 1. Attach the folding wrench to the extension and insert do the following: the chisel end on an angle through the hole in the rear bumper and into the hoist shaft. 2. Turn the folding wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue to turn the wrench so the compact spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle. 5-23 4. If your vehicle is an all-wheel-drive vehicle, after removing the compact spare tire turn the wrench clockwise to raise the cable back up. On and AWD vehicle, you can not store a full-size tire under the vehicle. It should be stowed inside the vehicle by the cable provided. See “Storing the Flat Tire on an All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle” later in this section. If you have a front-wheel-drive vehicle, the hoist is used to store a full-size or a flat road tire under the vehicle. See “Storing the Spare Tire and Tools” and “Storing the Flat Tire on a Front-Wheel-Drive Vehicle” later in this section. If the compact spare tire will not lower, check under the vehicle to see if the tire is hanging loose and the cable end and spring under the wheel plate are missing. If so 3. To remove the compact spare tire from the cable, tilt the secondary latch system is engaged. See “Secondary the retainer at the end of the cable so it can be pulled Latch System” later in this section. up through the wheel opening. To continue changing the flat tire see “Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire” later in this section.

5-24 Removing the Wheel Covers If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, use the handle of the folding wrench to pry the large center cap.

Then, with the other end of the folding wrench, loosen the nuts. If your vehicle has the plastic “bolt-on” wheel covers, loosen the bolts completely using the folding wrench, and remove the wheel cover.

5-25 Secondary Latch System (If Equipped) Your vehicle may have an underbody mounted tire hoist CAUTION: assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It’s designed to stop a tire from suddenly falling off your Before beginning this procedure read all the vehicle if the cable holding the spare tire is damaged. instructions. Failure to read and follow the For the secondary latch to work, the tire must be stowed instructions could damage the hoist assembly and with the valve stem pointing down. you and others could get hurt. Read and follow Front-wheel-drive vehicles use the underbody tire hoist the instructions listed below. assembly to store either the compact spare or a flat road tire. See “Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools” in the Index for instruction on storing the spare or flat To release the spare tire from the secondary latch, do tire correctly. the following: If your vehicle is equipped with all-wheel-drive, the underbody tire hoist assembly stores only the compact spare tire. See “Storing the Spare Tire and Tools” in the CAUTION: Index for instructions. To store a flat full–size tire correctly, see “Storing the Flat Tire on an Someone standing too close during the procedure All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle” in the Index. could be injured by the jack. If the spare tire does not slide off the jack completely, make sure no one is behind you or on either side of you as you pull the jack out from under the spare.

5-26 1. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the rear 5. Grasp the compact spare tire with both hands and bumper. Position the center lift point of the jack pull it out from under the vehicle. under the center of the compact spare tire. 6. Reach under the vehicle and remove the folding 2. Turn the folding wrench clockwise to raise the jack wrench and jack. until it lifts the secondary latch devise under the Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can. wheel plate. You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using the 3. Keep raising the jack until the compact spare tire hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced. stops moving upward and is held firmly in place, this lets you know that the secondary latch has released. 4. Lower the jack by turning the folding wrench counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the compact spare tire is resting on the folding wrench. 5-27 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire NOTICE:

1. Loosen the wheel To help avoid damage to the lock nut or the nuts -- but do not wheel lock key, do not use an impact wrench remove them -- using with this key. the folding wrench. (Turn the handle about 180 degrees, then flip the handle back to the starting position. This avoids taking the wrench off the lug nut for each turn.)

For wheels with a wheel lock key, use the wheel lock key between the lock nut and folding wrench. The key is supplied in the front passenger’s door pocket.

5-28 Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put the compact spare tire near you.

CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

2. Near each wheel, there is a notch in the vehicle’s body. Position the jack and raise the jack head until it fits firmly into the notch in the vehicle’s frame CAUTION: nearest the flat tire. Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even NOTICE: make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack Do not place the jack under the rear axle control lift head into the proper location before raising arms. Only use the areas shown for proper the vehicle. jack location.

5-29 3. Attach the folding 6. Remove any rust or dirt wrench to the jack, and from the wheel bolts, turn the wrench mounting surfaces and clockwise to raise the spare wheel. jack head a few inches.

4. Raise the vehicle by turning the folding wrench clockwise in the jack. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the CAUTION: compact spare tire to fit under the wheel well. 5. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire. Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.

5-30 CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could fall off, causing a serious accident.

7. Install the compact spare tire and put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub.

8. Lower the vehicle by attaching the folding wheel wrench to the jack and turning the wrench counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

5-31 9. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross NOTICE: sequence, as shown. Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification.

10. Don’t try to put a wheel cover on the compact spare tire. It won’t fit. Store the wheel cover securely in the rear of the vehicle until you have the flat tire CAUTION: repaired or replaced.

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose NOTICE: and even come off. This could lead to an accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have Wheel covers won’t fit on your compact spare. to replace them, be sure to get new GM original If you try to put a wheel cover on your compact equipment wheel nuts. spare, you could damage the cover or the spare. Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 100 lb-ft (140 N·m).

5-32 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools CAUTION:

CAUTION: The underbody-mounted spare tire needs to be stored with the valve stem pointing down. If the Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the spare tire is stored with its valve stem pointing passenger compartment of the vehicle could upwards, its secondary latch won’t work cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose properly, and the spare tire could loosen and equipment could strike someone. Store all these suddenly fall from your vehicle. If this happened in the proper place. when your vehicle was being driven, the tire might contact a person or another vehicle, causing injury and, of course, damage to itself as well. Be sure the underbody-mounted spare tire is stored with its valve stem pointing down.

5-33 Storing the Spare Tire and Tools 1. Lay the tire near the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem down. 2. If the vehicle has aluminum wheels, remove the small center cap by tapping the back of the cap with the extension of the shaft. 3. Slide the cable retainer through the center of the wheel and start to raise the tire. Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel. 4. When the tire is almost in the stored position, turn the tire so the valve is towards the rear of the vehicle. This will help when you check and maintain tire pressure in the spare. 6. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and 5. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the then try to rotate or turn the tire. If the tire moves, vehicle. Continue turning the folding wrench until use the folding wrench to tighten the cable. you feel more than two clicks. This indicates that the Put back all jacking tools as they were stored in the jack compact spare tire is secure and the cable is tight. storage compartment and put the compartment cover The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened. back on. To put the cover back on, line up the tabs on the right of the cover with the slots in the cover opening. Push the cover in place and push down the tab so that it rests in the groove. This secures the cover in place. 5-34 Storing the Flat Tire on a Front-Wheel-Drive Vehicle Follow the procedure for storing a spare tire listed previously. Storing the Flat Tire on an All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle 1. Remove the tire storage bag and cable package from the jack storage area 2. If the vehicle has aluminum wheels, remove the small center cap by tapping the back of the cap with the extension of the shaft. 3. Put the flat tire in the tire storage bag and place it in the rear storage area with the valve stem pointing toward the front of the vehicle.

A. Strap B. Bag and Tools C. Jack Unless you have the plastic “bolt-on” wheel covers, be sure to also store the center cap. When you replace the compact spare with a full-size tire, reinstall the bolt-on wheel covers and the center cap. Tighten them “hand tight” over the wheel nuts, using the folding wrench.

5-35 5. Hook the cable onto the outside portion of the liftgate hinges.

6. Pull on the cable to make sure it is secure. 7. Make sure the metal A. Cable tube is centered at the striker. Push the tube B. Liftgate Hinges towards the front of C. Door Striker the vehicle. 4. Pull the cable through the door striker and the center of the wheel.

8. Close the liftgate and make sure that it is latched.

5-36 Compact Spare Tire NOTICE: Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should When the compact spare is installed, don’t take be 60 psi (420 kPa). your vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel, should stop as soon as possible and make sure your and maybe other parts of your vehicle. spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles. so you can finish your trip and have your full-size tire repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’s best And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with to replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon as you other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare can. Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in tire and its wheel together. case you need it again. NOTICE:

Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. Using them can damage your vehicle and can damage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on your compact spare.

5-37 All-Wheel Drive (Option) If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow NOTICE: In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin After installing a compact spare tire on a vehicle your wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” with all-wheel drive you will need to drive with can help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must light to moderate acceleration, for 10 seconds, in use caution. a straight line. This action will allow the vehicle to detect the compact spare tire and disable the all-wheel drive system. The AWD DISABLE CAUTION: message will come on indicating that the all-wheel drive system is off. You may detect a If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can slight pull during this time, but this is normal. explode, and you or others could be injured. And, Damage to the all-wheel drive system will occur, the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle can if the vehicle is driven for an extended period overheat. That could cause an engine with a compact spare tire installed and the compartment fire or other damage. When you’re all-wheel drive system in operation. See stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t “All-Wheel Drive System” and “AWD Disable spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown Warning Message” in the Index for on the speedometer. more information.

5-38 Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out NOTICE: First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear the area around your front wheels. If your vehicle Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your has traction control, you should turn your traction vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels control system off. See “Traction Control System” in the too fast while shifting your transaxle back and Index. Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) forth, you can destroy your transaxle. and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the For information about using tire chains on your vehicle, transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in see “Tire Chains” in the Index. the forward and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.

5-39 Section 6 Service and Appearance Care

Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information, and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.

6-2 Service 6-35 Battery 6-3 Fuel 6-36 Bulb Replacement 6-5 Fuels in Foreign Countries 6-43 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 6-5 Filling Your Tank 6-45 Tires 6-8 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 6-54 Appearance Care 6-8 Checking Things Under the Hood 6-54 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle 6-12 Engine Oil 6-58 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle 6-17 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 6-61 Underbody Maintenance 6-19 Passenger Compartment Air Filter 6-61 Chemical Paint Spotting (If Equipped) 6-62 GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials 6-21 Automatic Transaxle Fluid 6-63 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 6-26 Engine Coolant 6-64 Electrical System 6-29 Radiator Pressure Cap 6-72 Replacement Bulbs 6-30 Power Steering Fluid 6-73 Capacities and Specifications 6-31 Windshield Washer Fluid 6-74 Air Conditioning Refrigerant Capacity 6-32 Brakes 6-74 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

6- 6-1 Service Doing Your Own Service Work Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and more about how to service your vehicle than this manual GM-trained and supported service people. can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index. We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index. You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.

6-2 Adding Equipment to the Outside of CAUTION: Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can You can be injured and your vehicle could be affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise damaged if you try to do service work on a and affect windshield washer performance. Check with vehicle without knowing enough about it. your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle. D Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, experience, the proper replacement parts Fuel and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task. Gasoline Octane D Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of other fasteners. “English” and “metric” 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a fasteners can be easily confused. If you use heavy knocking noise when you drive. If it is bad the wrong fasteners, parts can later break enough, it can damage your engine. A little pinging or fall off. You could be hurt. noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is necessary.

6-3 Gasoline Specifications California Fuel It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission which were developed by the American Automobile Standards (see the underhood emission control label), it Manufacturers Association and endorsed by the is designed to operate on fuels that meet California Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers’ Association for better specifications. If this fuel is not available in states vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasolines adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle meeting these specifications could provide improved will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal driveability and emission control system performance specifications, but emission control system performance compared to other gasolines. may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on (see “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index) In Canada, look for and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this the “Auto Makers’ occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for Choice” label on diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused the pump. by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty. Additives Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce Canada Only the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for service. 6-4 To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States Fuels in Foreign Countries are now required to contain additives that will help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming, If you plan on driving in another country outside the allowing your emission control system to work properly. United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to You should not have to add anything to your fuel. find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors your warranty. recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or they comply with the specifications described earlier. contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you’ll be driving. NOTICE: Filling Your Tank

Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Don’t use fuel containing CAUTION: methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under violently, and that can cause very bad injuries. your warranty. Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from gasoline.

6-5 The fuel door is located on the driver’s side of the vehicle. While refueling, let the fuel cap hang by the tether When the fuel door is opened on a vehicle with dual as shown. sliding doors, the driver’s side sliding door will only open partway.

6-6 To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right (counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring in it; if (clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure you let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can the right. determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in CAUTION: the Index. The malfunction indicator lamp (SERVICE ENGINE If you get gasoline on yourself and then SOON or CHECK ENGINE light) will come on if the something ignites it, you could be badly burned. fuel cap is not properly reinstalled. Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly. This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot NOTICE: weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you the way. get the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from light and may damage your fuel tank and painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the emissions system. See “Malfunction Indicator Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index. Lamp” in the Index.

6-7 Filling a Portable Fuel Container Checking Things Under the Hood

CAUTION: CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in An electric fan under the hood can start up and your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the injure you even when the engine is not running. container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this underhood electric fan. occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others: D Dispense gasoline only into approved containers. D Do not fill a container while it is inside a CAUTION: vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground. Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and D Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil, inside of the fill opening before operating coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other the nozzle. Contact should be maintained fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could until the filling is complete. be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things D Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline. that will burn onto a hot engine.

6-8 Hood Release To open the hood, do the following:

2. Go to the front of the vehicle and push up on the underhood release, located near the center under the grille. 1. Pull the hood release handle, located on the driver’s 3. Lift the hood. side under the instrument panel. 4. Pull forward on the hood prop to release it from its storage clip. The hood prop may be hot due to increased engine temperatures under the hood, so be careful when handling it. Use you hood prop sleeve when handling the hood prop.

6-9 5. Put the end of the hood Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on prop into the slot in the properly. Then follow these steps: underside of the hood. 1. Lift the hood to relieve pressure on the hood prop. 2. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood. 3. Return the prop to its retainer. 4. Let the hood down and close it firmly.

6-10 Engine Compartment Overview When you lift the hood, you’ll see these items:

A. Underhood Fuse Block D. Radiator Pressure Cap H. Transaxle Fluid Dipstick B. Remote Positive (+) Terminal E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir C. Windshield Washer F. Engine Oil Fill Cap J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Fluid Reservoir G. Engine Oil Dipstick K. Engine Coolant Reservoir 6-11 Engine Oil The engine oil dipstick is located at the front of the engine compartment, near the center. The dipstick handle has a bright, yellow loop design for easy identification. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for more United States Canada information on location.

If the low engine oil level message appears on the Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to instrument cluster, it means you need to check your drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick engine oil level right away. For more information, see might not show the actual level. “Low Engine Oil Level Message” in the Index. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, an added reminder. keeping the tip down, and check the level. Checking Engine Oil It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

6-12 When to Add Engine Oil The engine oil fill cap is located behind the engine If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you’ll need oil dipstick. See “Engine to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the Compartment Overview” in right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For the Index for more engine oil crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and information on location. Specifications” in the Index.

NOTICE:

Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross-hatched area that shows the proper Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in operating range, your engine could be damaged. the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you’re through.

6-13 What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by looking for the starburst symbol. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oil which does not carry this starburst symbol. If you change your own oil, be sure you use oil that has the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container. If you have your oil changed for you, be sure the oil put into your engine is American Petroleum Institute certified for gasoline engines.

You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your vehicle, as shown in the following chart:

6-14 As in the chart shown previously, SAE 5W-30 is best for GM GoodwrenchR oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle. However, you can use SAE 10W-30 if it’s your vehicle. _ _ going to be 0 F (-18 C) or above. These numbers on an If you are in an area where the temperature falls oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use below -20_F (-29_C), consider using either an other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50. SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely NOTICE: low temperatures. Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum Engine Oil Additives Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines Don’t add anything to your oil. The recommended oils starburst symbol. Failure to use the with the starburst symbol are all you will need for good recommended oil can result in engine damage not performance and engine protection. covered by your warranty.

6-15 When to Change Engine Oil How to Reset the Change Engine Oil Message (GM Oil Life Systemt) The GM Oil Life Systemt calculates when to change Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on your oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on when the next oil change is required. If a situation mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at occurs where you change your oil prior to a change which an oil change will be indicated can vary engine oil message being turned on, reset the system. considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, 1. With the ignition key in RUN but the engine off, you must reset the system every time the oil is changed. repeatedly push the trip/reset button until OIL is When the system has calculated that oil life has been displayed on the Driver Information Center. diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is 2. When OIL is displayed, push and hold the necessary. A change engine oil message will come on. trip/reset button for five seconds. The number will Change your oil as soon as possible within the next disappear and be replaced by 100 (indicating 100% two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, if you oil life remaining). are driving under the best conditions, the oil life system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for 3. Turn the key to OFF. over a year. However, your engine oil and filter must be If the change engine oil message comes back on, changed at least once a year and at this time the system the engine oil life monitor has not reset. Repeat must be reset. It is also important to check your oil the procedure. regularly and keep it at the proper level. If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed.

6-16 What to Do with Used Oil Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products. Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center for help. The engine air cleaner/filter is located at the front of the engine compartment, on the driver’s side of the vehicle, under the engine coolant reservoir. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for more information on location.

6-17 Checking or Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 1. Remove the two clamps on the duct. CAUTION: 2. Remove the duct. Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter 3. Unlatch the two hooks on top of the engine air off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner/filter housing. cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if 4. Remove and replace the engine air cleaner/filter. the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the 5. Align the tabs located on the bottom of the panel engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t with the slots at the bottom of the housing. drive with it off, and be careful working on the 6. Latch the hooks to secure the panel in place. If the engine with the air cleaner/filter off. panel moves easily, check that the tabs are seated correctly in the slots. 7. Put the duct back on and reinstall the clamps. NOTICE:

If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get into your engine, which will damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you’re driving.

6-18 Passenger Compartment Air Filter The access panel for the passenger compartment air filter is located in the back of the glove box. To replace (If Equipped) the filter, do the following: Passenger compartment air, both outside air and recirculated air, is routed through a passenger compartment filter, which is part of a two-piece filter system. The filter removes certain contaminants from the air, including pollen and dust particles, as well as odors such as exhaust or fuel fumes. Reductions in airflow, which may occur more quickly in dusty areas, indicate that the filter needs to be replaced early. For how often to change the air filter, see “Scheduled Maintenance” in the Index.

1. Pull the tab located on the outer access panel up and out.

6-19 2. Then push the tab, located on the left of the inner access panel, to the right. 3. The first air filter will pull straight out. To remove the second, reach in and slide it toward the opening. Pull the second filter out. 4. Replace the filters by reversing Step 3. Make sure the filters are inserted so that the sealing foam is angled in the same direction on both filters. For the type of filter to use, see “Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts” in the Index. 5. Close the inner access door, while squeezing the tab. Be sure it is tightly closed. 6. Snap the outer access panel into the back of the glove box.

6-20 Automatic Transaxle Fluid NOTICE: When to Check and Change A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid Too much or too little fluid can damage your level is when the engine oil is changed. transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little more of these conditions: fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat. Be D sure to get an accurate reading if you check your In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature transaxle fluid. regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher. D In hilly or mountainous terrain. Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle D When doing frequent trailer towing. fluid level if you have been driving: D Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. D When outside temperatures are above 90_F (32_C). If you do not use your vehicle under any of D At high speed for quite a while. these conditions, change the fluid and filter D In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather. at 100,000 miles (166 000 km). D While pulling a trailer. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal How to Check operating temperature, which is 180_F to 200_F (82_C to 93_C). Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at the dealership service department. Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50_F If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions (10_C). If it’s colder than 50_F (10_C), you may have here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick. to drive longer. 6-21 Checking the Fluid Level Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps: Prepare your vehicle as follows: D Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine running. D With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in PARK (P). D With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P). D Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.

The dipstick is located toward the back of the engine compartment, next to the brake master cylinder reservoir. The dipstick handle has a bright, red loop design for easy identification. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for more information on location.

6-22 1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the paper towel. proper fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched 2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and area on the dipstick. then pull it back out again. 1. Pull out the dipstick. 2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.

NOTICE:

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the We recommend you use only fluid labeled lower level. The fluid level must be in the DEXRONR-III, because fluid with that label is cross-hatched area. made especially for your automatic transaxle. Damage caused by fluid other than 4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the R dipstick back in all the way. DEXRON -III is not covered by your new vehicle warranty. How to Add Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what 3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as kind of transaxle fluid to use. See “Recommended described under “How to Check.” Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. 4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick back in all the way.

6-23 All-Wheel Drive (Option) How to Check Lubricant If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure to perform the lubricant checks described in this section. However, they have two additional systems that need lubrication. Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit) When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant. See “Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in the Index.

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface. If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.

6-24 What to Use How to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. Carrier Assembly-Differential (Rear Drive Module) When to Check and Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.

6-25 What to Use D Protect against rust and corrosion. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what D Help keep the proper engine temperature. kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and D Let the warning messages and gages work as Lubricants” in the Index. they should. Engine Coolant The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with NOTICE: DEX-COOLR engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles When adding coolant, it is important that you use (240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only only DEX-COOLR (silicate-free) coolant. DEX-COOLR extended life coolant. If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to the The following explains your cooling system and how system, premature engine, heater core or to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the with engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in engine coolant will require change sooner -- at the Index. 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and R whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the DEX-COOL coolant will: use of coolant other than DEX-COOLR is not D Give freezing protection down to -34_F (-37_C). covered by your new vehicle warranty. D Give boiling protection up to 265_F (129_C).

6-26 What to Use Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and NOTICE: one-half DEX-COOLR coolant which won’t damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you If you use an improper coolant mixture, your don’t need to add anything else. engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can CAUTION: freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper have your dealer check your cooling system. coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, NOTICE: your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning. Your engine could If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to catch fire and you or others could be burned. add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water improve the system. These can be harmful. and DEX-COOLR coolant.

6-27 Checking Coolant Adding Coolant If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOLR coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.

CAUTION:

Turning the radiator pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will almost never have to add coolant at the radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure cap -- even a little -- when the engine and radiator are hot.

The engine coolant reservoir is located on the driver’s side of the vehicle, above the engine air cleaner/filter. Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for not to spill it. more information on location. The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL COLD mark, or a little higher. When your engine is warm, the level should be above the FULL COLD mark or a little higher.

6-28 Radiator Pressure Cap CAUTION: NOTICE: You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol, Your radiator cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa) and it will burn if the engine parts are hot pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine. prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. For line up with the overflow tube on the radiator information on how to add coolant to the radiator, see filler neck. “Cooling System” in the Index. The radiator pressure cap is located at the front of the engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for more information on location.

6-29 Power Steering Fluid How to Check Power Steering Fluid The power steering fluid Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down, reservoir is located to the wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. right of the windshield washer fluid reservoir, Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick. at the back of the engine compartment. When the engine compartment is hot, the level should be at the H (hot) mark. When it’s cold, the level should be at the C (cold) mark. If the fluid is at the ADD mark, you should add fluid. What to Use When to Check Power Steering Fluid To determine what kind of fluid to use, see “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. It is not necessary to regularly check power steering Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals. you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for reservoir location.

6-30 Windshield Washer Fluid NOTICE: What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read D When using concentrated washer fluid, the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be follow the manufacturer’s instructions for operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature adding water. may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient D Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer protection against freezing. See “Engine Compartment fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze Overview” in the Index for reservoir location. and damage your washer fluid tank and Adding Washer Fluid other parts of the washer system. Also, water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid. Open the cap with the D Fill your washer fluid tank only washer symbol on it. three-quarters full when it’s very cold. This Add washer fluid until allows for expansion if freezing occurs, the tank is full. which could damage the tank if it is completely full. D Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your windshield washer. It can damage your washer system and paint.

6-31 Brakes There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid Brake Fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all. So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid. Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.

CAUTION:

Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on DOT-3 brake fluid. See “Engine Compartment the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot Overview” in the Index for the location of the reservoir. enough. You or others could be burned, and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid” in this section.

6-32 CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system, your brakes may not work well, or they may not even work at all. This could cause a United States Canada crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.

When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake warning light will come on. See “Brake System Warning NOTICE: Light” in the Index. What to Add D Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake system parts. For example, just a few When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake fluid. Refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine in the Index. Use new brake fluid from a sealed oil, in your brake system can damage brake container only. system parts so badly that they’ll have to be replaced. Don’t let someone put in the Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area wrong kind of fluid. around the cap before removing it. This will help keep D dirt from entering the reservoir. If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately. See “Appearance Care” in the Index.

6-33 Brake Wear Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes. applied. This does not mean something is wrong with Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that your brakes. make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the is moving (except when you are pushing on the brake proper sequence to GM torque specifications. pedal firmly). Your rear drum brakes don’t have wear indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the rear CAUTION: brake linings inspected immediately. Also, the rear brake drums should be removed and inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or changing. When The brake wear warning sound means that soon you have the front brake pads replaced, have the rear your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to brakes inspected, too. an accident. When you hear the brake wear Brake linings should always be replaced as complete warning sound, have your vehicle serviced. axle sets. See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of this manual under Part C “Periodic Maintenance Inspections.” NOTICE: Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal could result in costly brake repair. travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

6-34 Brake Adjustment Battery Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear. ACDelcoR battery. When it’s time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement number shown on the Replacing Brake System Parts original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many battery. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the parts have to be of top quality and work well together if Index for battery location. the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals parts. When you replace parts of your braking known to the State of California to cause cancer and system -- for example, when your brake linings wear reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. down and you need new ones put in -- be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes can change -- for the worse. The braking performance you’ve come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.

6-35 Vehicle Storage Bulb Replacement If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days For the type of bulbs, see “Replacement Bulbs” in or more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from the Index. the battery. This will help keep your battery from running down. For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer. Halogen Bulbs CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas CAUTION: that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and for tips on working around a battery without can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or getting hurt. others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package. Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods. Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent Feature” in the Index.

6-36 Headlamps 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the front turn signal/parking lamp assembly. See “Front Turn Signal/Parking/Sidemarker Lamps” later in this section.

4. Unscrew the black retainer ring that holds the bulb assembly in place. 5. Pull the bulb assembly straight up from the lamp housing. 6. Unhook the electrical connector by lifting up the blue tabs and pulling the bulb out. 3. Remove the two wing nuts located on top of the headlamp assembly.

6-37 7. Install the new bulb through the black retainer ring 8. Carefully put the bulb assembly back into the lamp and into the electrical connector. Tighten the black housing. Be careful not to damage the bulb on the retainer ring in place. Push the bulb firmly enough so headlamp aiming bar. that the blue tabs hook over the tab on the bulb.

6-38 Front Turn Signal/Parking/Sidemarker Lamps 1. Open the hood.

9. Align the pins on the bottom of the headlamp assembly with the holes in the lamp support bracket while placing the holes in the assembly over the bolts where the wing nuts attach. 2. Remove the thumbscrew attaching the front 10. Reinstall the wing nuts. turn signal/parking lamp assembly to the headlamp assembly. 11. To reinstall the front turn signal/parking lamp assembly See “Front Turn 3. Pull the front turn signal/parking lamp assembly Signal/Parking/Sidemarker Lamps” next. away from the vehicle. 4. Unscrew the bulb socket from the lamp assembly by pressing the tab while turning it counterclockwise.

6-39 Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamp Front Sidemarker Lamp 5. Replace the bulb by pulling the old one out and gently pushing the new one into the lamp socket. 6. Line up the tabs on the socket with the gaps in the socket holes and screw the bulb socket back into the lamp housing until a click is heard (the tab popping back out).

6-40 7. To reinstall the lamp assembly, line up and insert the tabs on the back of the assembly in the slots in the fender. Engage the lower clip on the back of the lamp assembly into the fender, keeping the upper tab on the front turn signal/parking lamp assembly inboard of the headlamp bracket tab. 8. To align the front turn signal/parking lamp assembly with the headlamp assembly, lift up the front turn signal/parking lamp assembly until the upper edge is contacting the fender. 9. Fasten the front turn signal/parking lamp assembly to the headlamp assembly with the thumbscrew removed in Step 2.

6-41 Taillamps, Back-Up Lamps, Rear Turn 4. Remove the bulb holder by pressing the four Signals, Brake Lamps retaining tabs and pulling the holder away from the assembly. 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the two screws from the taillamp housing on the inboard side. 3. Pull off the entire taillamp housing. The locator/retaining pins on the outboard side are part of the lamp assembly and will remain intact during removal.

A. Taillamp Bulb B. Back-Up Lamp Bulb C. Turn Signal Lamp Bulb D. Stop/Taillamp Bulb

6-42 5. Replace the bulb by pulling the old bulb out Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement and gently pushing the new bulb into the bulb holder socket. Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade 6. Snap the bulb holder back into place, making sure all Check” in the Index for more information. retaining tabs are properly over the bulb holder tabs. Replacement blades come in different types and are 7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly by inserting the removed in different ways. For proper type and length, outboard locating/retaining pins until the lamp is see “Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts” in seated. Secure with the inboard screws. the Index. To remove the windshield wiper blade(s) do the following: 1. Turn the wipers on to the lowest intermittent setting. 2. Turn the ignition to OFF while the wipers are at the outer position of the wipe pattern. The blades are more accessible for removal/replacement while in this position. 3. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the windshield or backglass.

6-43 4. While holding the wiper arm away from the glass, push the release clip from under the blade.

5. Push the release clip at the connecting point of the blade and the arm up. Then pull the blade assembly down toward the glass to remove it from the wiper arm. 6. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper arm until you hear the release clip “click” into place. 7. Push the release clip, from Step 4, down to secure the wiper blade into place.

6-44 Tires CAUTION: (Continued) Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions D Underinflated tires pose the same danger as about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see overloaded tires. The resulting accident your Chevrolet Warranty booklet for details. could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked CAUTION: when your tires are cold. D Overinflated tires are more likely to be Poorly maintained and improperly used tires cut, punctured or broken by a sudden are dangerous. impact -- such as when you hit a pothole. D Overloading your tires can cause Keep tires at the recommended pressure. overheating as a result of too much friction. D Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your You could have an air-out and a serious tread is badly worn, or if your tires have accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in been damaged, replace them. the Index. CAUTION: (Continued)

6-45 Inflation -- Tire Pressure NOTICE: (Continued) The Certification/Tire label, which is on the rear edge of the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation pressures If your tires have too much air (overinflation), for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your you can get the following: vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven D no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). Unusual wear D Bad handling D Rough ride NOTICE: D Needless damage from road hazards

Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or When to Check overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can Check your tires once a month or more. get the following: Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be D Too much flexing at 60 psi (420 kPa). D Too much heat D Tire overloading How to Check D Bad wear Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire D Bad handling pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated D Bad fuel economy simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they’re underinflated. NOTICE: (Continued) Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.

6-46 Tire Inspection and Rotation When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation pattern shown here. Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles (10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual Don’t include the compact spare tire in your wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check tire rotation. wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and inflation pressures as shown on the Certification/Tire label. “Wheel Replacement” later in this section for more Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. information. Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index. Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use the folding wrench to tighten the cable. See “Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools” in the Index. CAUTION: The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation is the Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which most important. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose the Index for scheduled rotation intervals. after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off. See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.

6-47 When It’s Time for New Tires You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true: One way to tell when it’s D time for new tires is to You can see the indicators at three or more places check the treadwear around the tire. indicators, which will D You can see cord or fabric showing through the appear when your tires have tire’s rubber. only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or D less of tread remaining. The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric. D The tire has a bump, bulge or split. D The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that can’t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage.

6-48 Buying New Tires To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at CAUTION: the Certification/Tire label. The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires, (radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way handle properly, and you could have a crash. your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed Using tires of different sizes may also cause to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating, damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same traction, ride and other things during normal service on size and type tires on all wheels. your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS” It’s all right to drive with your compact spare, (for mud and snow). though. It was developed for use on your vehicle. If you ever replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating and construction type (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires. CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.

6-49 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Treadwear Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled width. For example: conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course The following information relates to the system as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires developed by the United States National Highway depends upon the actual conditions of their use, Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires however, and may depart significantly from the norm by treadwear, traction and temperature performance. due to variations in driving habits, service practices and (This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) differences in road characteristics and climate. The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading Traction -- AA, A, B, C system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled or to some limited-production tires. conditions on specified government test surfaces of While the tires available on General Motors passenger asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these traction performance. Warning: The traction grade grades, they must also conform to federal safety assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking requirements and additional General Motors Tire traction tests, and does not include acceleration, Performance Criteria (TPC) standards. cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

6-50 Temperature -- A, B, C Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under and best overall performance. controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment The grade C corresponds to a level of performance may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle which all passenger car tires must meet under the vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. may need to be rebalanced. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

6-51 Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted CAUTION: or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your dangerous. It could affect the braking and dealer if any of these conditions exist. handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose air Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need. and make you lose control. You could have a Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying collision in which you or others could be injured. capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts and same way as the one it replaces. wheel nuts for replacement. If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle. NOTICE:

The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis.

See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for more information.

6-52 Used Replacement Wheels Tire Chains

CAUTION: NOTICE:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is Use tire chains only where legal and only when dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly that are the proper size for your tires. Install and cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, them on the front tires and tighten them as use a new GM original equipment wheel. tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle.

6-53 Appearance Care They can all be hazardous -- some more than others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too. Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can. match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are In many uses, these will damage your vehicle: dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space. D Alcohol When you use anything from a container to clean your D vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings Laundry Soap and instructions. And always open your doors or D Bleach windows when you’re cleaning the inside. D Reducing Agents Never use these to clean your vehicle: Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle D Gasoline D Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose Benzene dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces D Naphtha with a clean, damp cloth. D Carbon Tetrachloride D Acetone D Paint Thinner D Turpentine D Lacquer Thinner D Nail Polish Remover

6-54 Cleaning of Fabric/Carpet 4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Don’t saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly. Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains very 5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge well. You can get GM-approved cleaning products from to remove any excess cleaner. your dealer. See “Appearance Care and Materials” in 6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened the Index. towel or cloth. Here are some cleaning tips: 7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry. D Always read the instructions on the cleaner label. Special Fabric Cleaning Problems D Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set. Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black), D Carefully scrape off any excess stain. egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and D Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a blood can be removed as follows: clean area often. A soft brush may be used if 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the stains are stubborn. soiled area with cool water. D If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean the 2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions entire area immediately or it will set. described earlier. Using Cleaner on Fabric 3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a water/baking soda solution: 1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt. 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) 2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask of lukewarm water. surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines. 4. Let dry. 3. Follow the directions on the container label.

6-55 Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili Cleaning Leather sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows: Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain. saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the 2. First, clean with cool water and allow to leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry. dry completely. D For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your 3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions dealer for this product. described earlier. D Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather. Cleaning Vinyl D Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned Use warm water and a clean cloth. immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the D Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. finish, it can harm the leather. You may have to do it more than once. Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel D Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces and a vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or this product. waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions. Cleaning Interior Plastic Components Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the surface finish.

6-56 Cleaning the Built-in Child Cleaning Glass Surfaces Restraint Pad Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a The built-in child restraint pad is attached to the seat liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal frame with fastener strips. You can remove the pad and tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See hand wash it with mild soap and water. “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index. Care of Safety Belts and Built-in Child Restraint Harness NOTICE: Keep the safety belts and the built-in child restraint Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they harness clean and dry. may cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window, since they may have to be scraped off later. If abrasive cleaners are used on CAUTION: the inside of the rear window, an electric defogger element may be damaged. Any Do not bleach or dye safety belts or the built-in temporary license should not be attached across child restraint harness. If you do, they may be the defogger grid. severely weakened. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean the safety belts and the child restraint harness only with mild soap and lukewarm water.

6-57 Cleaning the Outside of the Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle Windshield, Backglass and The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth Wiper Blades of color, gloss retention and durability. If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield Washing Your Vehicle washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax, sap or other material may be on the blade The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it or windshield. clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water. Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps or do not form when you rinse it with water. chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap residue completely. You can get Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. See and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index. Don’t vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water. contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary; flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, replace blades that look worn. or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface Weatherstrips scratches and water spotting. Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them Before you enter an automatic car wash, if your vehicle last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. is equipped with the optional power sliding door, be sure Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least to have the switch for the power sliding door override every six months. During very cold, damp weather feature enabled. See “Power Sliding Door” in the Index. more frequent application may be required. See High pressure car washes may cause water to enter “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. your vehicle. 6-58 Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car NOTICE: washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.” Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the Finish Care finish or leave swirl marks. Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird from your dealer. See “Appearance Care and Materials” droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can in the Index. damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter. non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather paint finish. and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.

6-59 Cleaning Aluminum Wheels Cleaning Tires (If Equipped) To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner. Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax NOTICE: may then be applied. When applying a tire dressing always take care to The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps, surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle. chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because Petroleum-based products may damage the paint you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish finish and tires. on aluminum wheels. Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash Sheet Metal Damage that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels. repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection. Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.

6-60 Finish Damage At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode of the frame should be loosened before being flushed. quickly and may develop into a major repair expense. Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up this for you. materials available from your dealer or other service outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected Chemical Paint Spotting in your dealer’s body and paint shop. Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and Underbody Maintenance attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped control can collect on the underbody. If these are discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur into the paint surface. on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, Although no defect in the paint job causes this, floor pan and exhaust system even though they have Chevrolet will repair, at no charge to the owner, the corrosion protection. surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.

6-61 GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

6-62 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Engine Identification The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This code will help you identify your engine, specifications and replacement parts. Service Parts Identification Label You’ll find this label on the inside of the access panel located on the driver’s side of the rear of the vehicle. It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on label is: a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the D your VIN, driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the D the model designation, windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts D paint information and labels and the certificates of title and registration. D a list of all production options and special equipment. Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.

6-63 Electrical System Headlamp Wiring Add-On Electrical Equipment The headlamp wiring is protected by an internal circuit breaker in the instrument panel fuse panel. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and off, or in NOTICE: some cases to remain off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked right away. Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle Windshield Wipers unless you check with your dealer first. Some The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal electrical equipment can damage your vehicle circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical can keep other components from working as problem, be sure to get it fixed. they should. Power Windows and Other Power Options Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to Circuit breakers in the instrument panel fuse panel add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing protect the power windows and other power accessories. Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.

6-64 Fuses and Circuit Breakers Instrument Panel Fuse Block The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from The instrument panel fuse short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers block is located to the right and fusible thermal links. of the glove box on the end Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the of the instrument panel. band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating. If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same amperage or use one of the spare fuses in the underhood fuse block. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without -- like the radio or cigarette lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the right amperage. Pull the door open to access the instrument panel Replace it as soon as you can. fuse block. There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the instrument panel fuse block and the underhood fuse block.

6-65 Circuit Breakers Usage PWR/HEATED Six-Way Power Seats and Rear SEAT PSD Side Door Actuator Motor FRT HVAC Blower Motor Hi Speed HI BLWR Relay Module Fuses Usage SWC Steering Wheel Radio Control BACKLIGHT Switches (Illumination) PCM/PASS Instrument Cluster to KEY/CLUSTER PRNDL Indicators PWR MIRROR Power Remote Control Mirror Switch Circuit Breakers Usage CRUISE Cruise Control Module, Switch HEADLAMP Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) and Release Switch Control Module, Headlamp and Blank Not Used Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch PCM/CRANK Powertrain Control Module PWR SLD DR Power Sliding Door (PCM), Ignition Crank PWR WDO Front Power Windows PASS KEY PASS-KeyR III System

6-66 Fuses Usage Fuses Usage PWR LOCK Power Door Locks RR DEFOG/HTD Rear Window Defogger Relay, MIRROR Heated Mirrors HTD MIRROR Heated Mirrors ON STAR OnStarR RH T/LP Driver’s Side Taillamp SIR Inflatable Restraint RR FOG LP Fog Lamps Control Module CIGAR/DIC/APO Cigarette Lighter, DIC, Front HVAC BLOWER Heater-A/C Control FRT Auxiliary Power Outlets MALL Instrument Cluster, Body Control T/SIG Turn Signal Switch CLUSTER Module, Electronic Level PWR QTR VENT Interior Lamp and Multifunction Control (ELC) Sensor and Relay Switch (Power Vent Switch) STOP LAMP Stoplamp Switch FRT/WPR/WSHR Windshield Wiper/Washer Motor CLUSTER BATT Module/Electronic Brake and Switch Control Module/Electronic HAZARD Hazard Switch Brake Traction Control RR PWR SCKT Rear Electric Accessory Module (EBCM/EBTCM) Plug Housing ENHANCED Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) DRL Daytime Running Lamp EVAP/AWD Canister Vent Solenoid Valve, Control Module All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LH T/LP Passenger’s Side Taillamp Blank Not Used ELC/TRAILER ELC Air Compressor and ELC Relay, Trailer Harness

6-67 Fuses Usage Fuses Usage CTSY LAMP Courtesy Lamp Blank Not Used IGN 1 BCM, Electronic Brake Control Blank Not Used Indicator Lamp Driver Module, RAP RELAY Retained Accessory Instrument Panel Cluster, Rear Power (RAP) Relay Side Door Actuator Control Module, Rear Windows Blank Not Used RR HVAC Rear HVAC-A/C Control HVAC/DIC/DRL/ Air Inlet Actuator, DIC Display, TEMP CONT HEATED SEAT DRL Control Module, Heater-A/C Control, Temperature RR WPR/WSHR Rear Window Wiper Motor, Rear Door Actuator (Front) and Rear Window Wiper/Washer and Window Defogger Relay Multifunction Switch (Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch) BCM PRGRAM BCM Programming LH Passenger’s Side Low RH HEAD LP Driver’s Side Low HEADLP LOW Beam Headlamp LOW Beam Headlamp LH Passenger’s Side High RH HEAD LP Driver’s Side High HEADLP HIGH Beam Headlamp HIGH Beam Headlamp Blank Not Used PCM/ABS IGN MAIN Relay and PCM, Electronic Brake Control Module

6-68 Underhood Fuse Block This fuse block is located in the engine compartment, in front of the windshield washer fluid reservoir. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for more information on location.

Maxi Fuse Usage The fuses marked spare are available if a replacement fuse is needed. 1 Coolant Fans To remove the cover, turn the knob counterclockwise 2 Not Used and lift up. 3 Circuit Breakers: Front Comfort When finished, to put the cover back on, turn the knob Controls Hi Blower, and clockwise to tighten it. Make sure that the remote Headlamp Fuses (Instrument positive (+) terminal cover is on correctly. Panel): Hazard and Stoplamp 4 Circuit Breaker: Power Seat. Fuses (Instrument Panel): Electronic Level Control and Rear Defogger

6-69 Maxi Fuse Usage Maxi Fuse Usage 5 Ignition Switch to Fuses 8 Ignition Switch to Fuses (I/P): (Instrument Panel): ABS/TCS Body Control Module Program, Ignition, Cruise, DRL, Electronic Front Comfort Controls PRNDL, Ignition 1, PSD, Air Bag, Low/Medium Blower, Front Turn Signal and Powertrain Wiper/Washer, HVAC/DRL, Control Module [IGN MAIN MALL/Radio/DIC, Power Relay (Underhood Fuse Block: Quarter Vent, Rear HVAC, A/C Clutch, Electronic Ignition, Rear Wiper/Washer. SWC Ignition 1-U/H, INJ, TCC)] Accessory and Power Window Circuit Breaker 6 Coolant Fans Mini Relays Usage 7 Fuses (Instrument Panel): ABS Module Battery, Cigarette Lighter, 9 Right Fan 1, Left Fan 2 Courtesy Lamps, Front Power 10 Left Fan 2 Socket, Power Locks, Power Mirrors and Right Rear 11 Fuses: A/C Clutch, Ignition Power Socket 1-U/H, INS, Electronic Ignition, TCC 12 Right Fan 1, Left Fan 2

6-70 Micro Relays Usage Mini Fuse Usage 13 A/C Clutch 25 Ignition Control Module (ICM) 14 Fuel Pump 26 Not Used 15 Not Used 27 Transaxle Range Switch to Back up Lamps 16 Horn - 28 A/C Clutch Relay to A/C 17 Left Fog Lamp, Right Fog Lamp, Compressor Clutch Oil Fog Lamp Indicator 29 Driver Information Display, Mini Fuse Usage Heater A/C Control, Radio, Rear 18 Fuel Injectors 1-6 Side Door Actuator Control 19 Not Used Motor, Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR), Security 20 Not Used Indicator Lamp and 21 Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) Theft-Deterrent Shock Sensor Canister Purge Valve, Heated 30 Generator Oxygen Sensors 1 and 2, Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor 31 Automatic Transaxle (Torque Converter Clutch Solenoids) 22 Not Used Stoplamp Switch to Powertrain 23 Not Used Control Module 24 Not Used 32 Fuel Pump Relay

6-71 Mini Fuse Usage Replacement Bulbs 33 Powertrain Control Module Headlamps...... 9004-HBI Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamps...... 4157 NAK 34 Radio Front Sidemarker Lamps...... 194 35 Fog Lamp Relay Stop/Taillamps (Top)...... 3057 36 Horn Relay Signal Lamps (2nd from Top)...... 3156 37 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Back-up Lamps (3rd from Top)...... 3156 Control Module, Headlamps Taillamps (Bottom)...... 3057 and Instrument Panel Dimmer For any bulb not listed here, contact your dealer. Switch Theft-Deterrent Relay to Headlamps 38 Not Used 39 AIR Diodes

Air Conditioning Clutch Diode 40 Mini Fuse Puller

6-72 Capacities and Specifications Engine Oil with Filter ...... 4.5 quarts (4.25 L) Fuel Capacity The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric measurements. Standard/Regular...... 20.0 U.S. gallons (75.0 L) Optional/Extended...... 25.1 U.S. gallons (95.0 L) Please refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” Wheel Nut Torque ...... 100 lb-ft (140 N·m) in the Index for more information. Automatic Transaxle All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended Pan Removal in this manual. and Replacement...... 7.4 quarts (7.0 L) Complete Overhaul...... 10.0 quarts (9.5 L) Engine Specifications AWD Automatic Transaxle Pan Removal Engine VIN Code...... E and Replacement...... 8.7 quarts (8.3 L) Engine Type...... V6 Complete Overhaul...... 10.8 quarts (10.3 L) Firing Order...... 1-2-3-4-5-6 Cooling System With A/C...... 9.6 quarts (9.1 L) With Rear Climate Control. . . . . 11.9 quarts (11.3 L)

6-73 Air Conditioning Normal Maintenance Refrigerant Capacity Replacement Parts If you do your own service work, you’ll need the proper Engine Air Cleaner/Filter...... A-1208C* service manual. See “Doing Your Own Service Work” in Engine Oil Filter...... PF47 the Index for additional information. It is recommended Passenger Compartment that service work on your air conditioning system be Air Filter (2)...... GM Part No. 52482929 performed by a qualified technician. Spark Plugs...... 41-940* Air Conditioning Refrigerant Systems Gap: 0.060 inches (1.5 mm) Front A/C...... 1.7 lbs. (0.8 kg) Windshield Wiper Blades Front and Rear A/C...... 2.2 lbs. (1.0 kg) Length...... 24.0 inches (60.0 cm) Type...... Shepherd’s Hook Use Refrigerant Oil, R134a Systems Wiper Blade (Backglass) Length...... 16.0 inches (40.6 cm) Type...... Shepherd’s Hook * ACDelcoR part number.

6-74 Section 7 Maintenance Schedule

This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety, dependability and emission control performance.

7-2 Introduction 7-20 Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections 7-4 Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services 7-22 Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 7-15 Part B: Owner Checks and Services 7-24 Part E: Maintenance Record

7- 7-1 Introduction Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the environment. All recommended maintenance procedures are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition, please maintain your vehicle properly. Maintenance Requirements Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your working condition. Any damage caused by failure to Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer follow recommended maintenance may not be covered for details. by warranty.

7-2 How This Section is Organized “Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what should be checked and when. It also explains This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts: what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in “Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains good condition. what to have done and how often. Some of these “Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains services can be complex, so unless you are technically important inspections that your dealer’s service qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should department or another qualified service center let your dealer’s service department or another qualified should perform. service center do these jobs. “Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists some recommended products necessary to help keep CAUTION: your vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their equivalents, should be used whether you do the work yourself or have it done. Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can “Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance you to record and keep track of the maintenance performed on your vehicle. Keep your maintenance work only if you have the required know how - receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle and the proper tools and equipment for the job. for warranty repairs. If you have any doubt, have a qualified technician do the work.

If you want to get the service information, see “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.

7-3 Part A: Scheduled This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedule them. If you Maintenance Services go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know Using Your Maintenance Schedule that GM-trained and supported service people will perform the work using genuine GM parts. We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive uses these. All parts should be replaced and all long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather. necessary repairs done before you or anyone else You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. drives the vehicle. Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many This schedule is for vehicles that: other ways. D carry passengers and cargo within recommended Because of all the different ways people use their limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more Certification/Tire label. See “Loading Your Vehicle” frequent checks and replacements. So please read the in the Index. following and note how you drive. If you have any D are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal questions on how to keep your vehicle in good driving limits. condition, see your dealer. D use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.

7-4 Scheduled Maintenance

The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles Footnotes (166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles [ (166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the this vehicle. The services shown at 150,000 miles California Air Resources Board has determined that the (240 000 km) should be repeated at the same interval failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify after 150,000 miles (240 000 km) for the life of the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to this vehicle. the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic performed at the indicated intervals and the Maintenance Inspections” following. maintenance be recorded. + A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this schedule.

7-5 Scheduled Maintenance

Engine Oil and Chassis Lubrication Change your oil as soon as possible within the next Scheduled Maintenance two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the oil life system Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for GM Oil Life Systemt (or every 12 months, over a year. However, your engine oil and filter must whichever occurs first). Reset the system. be changed at least once a year and at this time the Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know system must be reset. It is also important to check when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level. engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oil which an oil change will be indicated can vary change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, the oil is changed. See “Oil Life System” in the Index you must reset the system every time the oil is changed. for information on resetting the system. When the system has calculated that oil life has been An Emission Control Service. diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary. A change engine oil message will come on. Lubricate chassis components with each engine oil and filter change. Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable guides and the underbody contact points and linkage.

7-6 Scheduled Maintenance

7-7 Scheduled Maintenance

7-8 Scheduled Maintenance

7,500 Miles (12 500 km) DATE j ACTUAL All-wheel drive/drive axle service. If your vehicle is used to pull a trailer, SERVICED BY: change the rear axle fluid. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the MILEAGE Index for the proper fluid to use. j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

15,000 Miles (25 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. SERVICED BY: Replace filter if necessary. MILEAGE An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.) j Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may require replacement more often. j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

22,500 Miles (37 500 km) DATE j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper ACTUAL SERVICED BY: rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) MILEAGE

7-9 Scheduled Maintenance

30,000 Miles (50 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly under dusty SERVICED BY: conditions, the filter may require replacement more often. MILEAGE j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) j Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service.

37,500 Miles (62 500 km) DATE j ACTUAL Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper SERVICED BY: rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) MILEAGE

45,000 Miles (75 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. SERVICED BY: Replace filter if necessary. MILEAGE An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.) j Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may require replacement more often. j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

7-10 Scheduled Maintenance

50,000 Miles (83 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven SERVICED BY: under one or more of these conditions: MILEAGE – In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher. – In hilly or mountainous terrain. – When doing frequent trailer towing. – Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid and filter at 100,000 miles (166 000 km).

52,500 Miles (87 500 km) DATE j ACTUAL Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper SERVICED BY: rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) MILEAGE

7-11 Scheduled Maintenance

60,000 Miles (100 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly under dusty SERVICED BY: conditions, the filter may require replacement more often. MILEAGE j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) j Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission Control Service. j Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service.

67,500 Miles (112 500 km) DATE j ACTUAL Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper SERVICED BY: rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) MILEAGE

75,000 Miles (125 000 km) DATE j Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. ACTUAL SERVICED BY: Replace filter if necessary. MILEAGE An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.) j Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may require replacement more often. j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 7-12 Scheduled Maintenance

82,500 Miles (137 500 km) DATE j ACTUAL Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper SERVICED BY: rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) MILEAGE

90,000 Miles (150 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly under dusty SERVICED BY: conditions, the filter may require replacement more often. MILEAGE j Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service. j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

97,500 Miles (162 500 km) DATE j ACTUAL Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper SERVICED BY: rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) MILEAGE

7-13 Scheduled Maintenance

100,000 Miles (166 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Inspect spark plug wires. SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. MILEAGE j Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service. j Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: – In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher. – In hilly or mountainous terrain. – When doing frequent trailer towing. – Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. j If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transaxle fluid, change both the fluid and filter.

150,000 Miles (240 000 km) DATE j ACTUAL Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last SERVICED BY: service, whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for MILEAGE what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.

7-14 Part B: Owner Checks and Services Engine Coolant Level Check R Listed in this part are owner checks and services which Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL should be performed at the intervals specified to help coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in ensure the safety, dependability and emission control the Index for further details. performance of your vehicle. Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your Check the windshield washer fluid level in the vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if in Part D. necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index for further details. At Each Fuel Fill At Least Once a Month It is important for you or a service station attendant to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill. Tire Inflation Check Engine Oil Level Check Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures. Don’t forget to check your spare tire. See “Tires” in the Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil Index for further details. if necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for further details. Cassette Deck Service Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every 50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the Index for further details.

7-15 At Least Twice a Year Spare Tire Check At least twice a year, after the monthly inflation check Restraint System Check of the spare tire determines that the spare is inflated to Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your the correct tire inflation pressure, make sure that the belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try to working properly. If your vehicle has a built-in child rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use the folding wrench restraint, also periodically make sure the harness straps, to tighten the cable. See “Storing the Spare Tire and latch plates, buckle, clip, child head restraint and Tools” in the Index. anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt and built-in child restraint Weatherstrip Lubrication system parts. If you see anything that might keep a Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last safety belt or built-in child restraint system from doing longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, belts or harness straps replaced. damp weather more frequent application may be Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings, required. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system in the Index. does not need regular maintenance.) Automatic Transaxle Check Wiper Blade Check Check the transaxle fluid level; add if needed. See Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade “Automatic Transaxle Fluid” in the Index. A fluid inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or loss may indicate a problem. Check the system and miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades, repair if needed. Cleaning” in the Index.

7-16 At Least Once a Year Starter Switch Check Key Lock Cylinders Service Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant CAUTION: specified in Part D. When you are doing this check, the vehicle could Body Lubrication Service move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assemblies, injured. Follow the steps below. secondary latches, pivots, spring anchor and release pawl, hood and door hinges, rear folding seats, fuel door hinge, liftgate hinges, power sliding door cable and 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room sliding door track(s). Part D tells you what to use. More around the vehicle. frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular corrosive environment. brake. See “Parking Brake” in the Index if necessary. Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts. 3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in any other position, your vehicle needs service.

7-17 Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control 3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN System Check position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever CAUTION: moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service. Ignition Transaxle Lock Check When you are doing this check, the vehicle could move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position. injured. Follow the steps below. D The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P). 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough D room around the vehicle. It should be parked The key should come out only in LOCK. on a level surface. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See “Parking Brake” in the Index if necessary. Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move.

7-18 Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle PARK (P) Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing Mechanism Check downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake. D To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With CAUTION: the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake When you are doing this check, your vehicle pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking could begin to move. You or others could be brake only. injured and property could be damaged. Make D To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular Then release the parking brake followed by the brake at once should the vehicle begin to move. regular brake. Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring, use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect.

7-19 Part C: Periodic Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle Maintenance Inspections Boot and Seal Inspection Listed in this part are inspections and services which Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering should be performed at least twice a year (for instance, system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering service department or other qualified service center lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive completed at once. axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace seals if necessary. Proper procedures to perform these services may be found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner Exhaust System Inspection Publications” in the Index. Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged, missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams, holes, loose connections or other conditions which could cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.

7-20 Fuel System Inspection Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit) and Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks. Carrier Assembly - Differential (Rear Drive Module) All-Wheel Drive Inspection Engine Cooling System Inspection Every 12 months or at engine oil change intervals, Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are check rear differential and transfer case and add cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes, lubricant when necessary. A fluid loss could indicate a fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the outside problem; check and have it repaired, if needed. Check of the radiator and air conditioning condenser. To help vent hoses at transfer case and differential for kinks and ensure proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling proper installation. system and pressure cap is recommended at least once a year. Brake System Inspection Throttle System Inspection Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as for surface condition. Also inspect drum brake linings needed. Replace any components that have high effort for wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc. cruise control cables. Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions result in frequent braking.

7-21 Part D: Recommended Fluids USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT and Lubricants Hydraulic Delco Supreme 11R Brake Fluid Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, Brake System (GM Part No. 12377967 or part number or specification may be obtained from equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid). your dealer. Windshield GM OptikleenR Washer USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT Washer Solvent Solvent (GM Part No. 1051515) or equivalent. Engine Oil Engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified for Power GM Power Steering Fluid Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Steering System (GM Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint, of the proper viscosity. To 1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent). determine the preferred viscosity R Automatic DEXRON -III Automatic for your vehicle’s engine, see Transaxle Transmission Fluid. “Engine Oil” in the Index. Key Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable Lock Cylinders R water and use only GM Superlube (GM Part GoodwrenchR DEX-COOLR or No. 12346241 or equivalent). HavolineR DEX-COOLR Coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index.

7-22 USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT Chassis Chassis Lubricant (GM Part Hood and Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Lubrication No. 12377985 or equivalent) Door Hinges SuperlubeR (GM Part or lubricant meeting requirements No. 12346241 or equivalent). of NLGI # 2, Category LB or GC-LB. Rear Folding Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Seat, Fuel R Carrier VERSATRAK Fluid Superlube (GM Part Door Hinge, No. 12346241 or equivalent). Assembly - (GM Part No. 12378514). Liftgate Hinges, Differential Power Sliding (Rear Drive Door Cable Module) and Transfer Case Sliding LubriplateR Lubricant Aerosol (Power Door Track (GM Part No. 12346293 or Transfer Unit) equivalent) or lubricant meeting R requirements of NLGI # 2, Hood Latch Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol Category LB or GC-LB. Assembly, (GM Part No. 12346293 or Secondary Latch, equivalent) or lubricant meeting Weatherstrip Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Pivots, Spring requirements of NLGI # 2, Conditioning Part No. 12345579 or equivalent). Anchor and Category LB or GC-LB. Release Pawl

7-23 Part E: Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval. Any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on the following record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them.

Maintenance Record